JP6471321B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  There is known a gaming machine that pre-reads the start-up memory of a variable display game and notifies the occurrence of a big hit on the basis of the pre-read result before executing the corresponding variable display game.

JP 2010-119426 A

However, various notice effects on the liquid crystal display device are already in a saturated state, and simply having a notice notification function is not sufficient to improve the gameability of the gaming machine.
In one aspect, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving game playability.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine as shown below is provided. The gaming machine includes a first display device, a second display device, and a control unit. The first display device can display identification information and start memory in the variable display game. The second display device includes a first display unit capable of displaying the start-up memory and an operation unit capable of accepting a player's operation input corresponding to the first display unit. The control unit includes a first state in which the start memory is displayed on the second display unit and the third display unit of the first display device, and a second state in which the start memory is displayed on the first display unit and the second display unit. a switchable, changes the display mode of the first display unit on the definitive start memory on the basis of the operation input accepted in the second state.

  According to the one aspect, in the gaming machine, it is possible to improve the game performance.

It is a perspective view which shows an example of the game machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the control system of the game machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of a structure of the presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the package display apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (1) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 8 is a (second) diagram illustrating a flowchart of main processing according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the checksum calculation process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the initial value random number update process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the input process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the switch reading process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the output process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the payout command transmission process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the random number update process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the random number update process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a winning opening switch / state monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fraud & winning prize monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a winning number counter update process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the gaming machine state check process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the payout busy signal check process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure game process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the start port switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the hard random number acquisition process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure start port switch common process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure pending | holding information determination process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big winning opening switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure normal process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure normal process transfer setting process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation start process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big hit flag 1 setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big hit flag 2 setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot determination process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit determination processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure information setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation pattern setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the change start information setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure change process transition setting process (special figure 1) of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a special figure fluctuation process transfer setting process (special figure 2) of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process during special figure change of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure display process transition setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (The 1) which shows the flowchart of the special figure display middle process of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (2) which shows the flowchart of the special figure display middle process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the high probability variation frequency update process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the production mode information check process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a fanfare / interval process transfer setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transfer setting process 1 in the small hitting fanfare of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a fanfare / interval process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transfer setting process during special winning opening opening of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big winning opening open | release process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big winning opening remaining ball process transfer setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big winning opening remaining ball process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process 2 of the fanfare / interval of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big hit end process transfer setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot end process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big hit end setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure normal process transfer setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process during a small hitting fanfare of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a process process setting process for small hits of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the middle hit process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit operation | movement transfer setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the small hit operation | movement of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit remaining ball process transfer setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit remaining ball process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit | end process transfer setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit | end process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure normal process transfer setting process 3 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the production command setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the symbol fluctuation | variation control process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the distribution process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a 2 byte distribution process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the usual game process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the gate switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the general power prize winning switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the usual figure normal process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the usual figure normal process transfer setting process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transfer setting process in the normal fluctuation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process during the usual figure change of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process in the normal map display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process during normal map display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process in the normal process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process during a common figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the general electric operation transfer setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the general electric operation | movement timing chart of the normal fluctuation winning device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the general electric power remaining ball process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the end process shift setting process of the common figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the end process per common figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the usual figure normal process transfer setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the segment LED edit process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the magnet fraud monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (1) which shows the flowchart of the external information edit process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 6 is a second diagram illustrating a flowchart of external information editing processing according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main prize ball signal edit process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transmission timing chart of the main prize ball signal of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the start port signal edit process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main process in the production | presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the reception command check process in the presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the received command analysis process in the presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the point control process in the production | presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the point initialization process in the production | presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the point update process in the production | presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the point table of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the point indicator of the point accumulation value update process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the point exchange process in the production | presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection operation screen of the privilege displayed on the display apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (modification 1) of the point table of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (modification 2) of the point table of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (modification 3) of the privilege selection operation screen displayed on the display apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 4th Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 5th Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 6th Embodiment. It is the figure (the 1) which shows the example of a display of the variable display screen displayed on the display apparatus of 7th Embodiment, and a point indicator. It is the figure (the 2) which shows the example of a display of the fluctuation display screen displayed on the display apparatus of 7th Embodiment, and a point indicator. It is the figure (the 3) which shows the example of a display of the fluctuation display screen displayed on the display apparatus of 7th Embodiment, and a point indicator. It is a figure (the 4) which shows the example of a display of the fluctuation display screen displayed on the display apparatus of 7th Embodiment, and a point indicator. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the special symbol of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the point control process in the presentation control apparatus of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the 2nd point exchange process in the presentation control apparatus of 7th Embodiment. It is an example of the state transition diagram of the game state regarding the special figure game of 8th Embodiment. It is an example of the state transition diagram of the display state corresponding to the game state of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the correspondence of a game state and a display state by making the frequency | count of fluctuation of 8th Embodiment into a time axis. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special display state transition process of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen in the special display state of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the panel fluctuation | variation flow of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 1) of the matrix display screen of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 2) of the matrix display screen of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 3) of the matrix display screen of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 4) of the matrix display screen of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 5) of the matrix display screen of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the special effect display screen in the low probability display state of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the background display outside a flame | frame and the background display within a flame | frame of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a background outside a frame and panel display of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a connection of the presentation control apparatus of 9th Embodiment, and an option setting part. It is a figure which shows the example of arrangement | positioning of push button LED and the touch sensor in the push button of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen during a variable display in the display apparatus of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the switch (PB switching) from the hold display in the display apparatus of 9th Embodiment to the hold display in a push button. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode update of the hold display in the push button of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the switch from the hold display in the push button of 9th Embodiment to the hold display in a display apparatus (PB switching end). It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure holding | maintenance management table of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display division table of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart of switching of the display apparatus of 9th Embodiment, and the hold display of a push button. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the prefetch control process of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the PB reservation prefetch process of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the update of the display display number of a display apparatus and a push button when there is a start prize during switching of the hold display of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the update of the display display number of a display apparatus and a push button when there exists a start prize during the change of the hold display of the modification 1 of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the switch (PB switch) from the hold display in the display apparatus of the modification 2 of 9th Embodiment to the hold display in a touch panel.

Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[First Embodiment]
First, a first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an example of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. A glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  In addition, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, lamps and LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) are built in, and decorations and effects, and notifications when abnormalities occur (for example, if a payout abnormality occurs, the lamps and LEDs are abnormal) A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing) in a notification color (for example, red) and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, a sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by sound from the speakers 19a and 19b. Note that a discharge abnormality notification lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

  Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 and an upper plate (storage plate) 21 for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launcher are shown. There are provided an upper tray ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 that stores game balls that are paid out in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the ball striking device, and the like. Furthermore, an option setting unit 25 for allowing the player to set various options is provided on the upper edge of the upper plate 21. A plurality of selection button switches 25 a are provided around the upper surface of the option setting unit 25, and a determination button switch 25 b is provided at the center of the upper surface of the option setting unit 25. The option setting unit 25 functions as an effect setting unit in which the player sets an effect mode. In this case, the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch for selecting an effect mode, and the determination button switch 25b functions as a determination button switch for determining an effect mode. Further, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.

  When the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch, the gaming machine 10 produces an effect in which the player's operation is intervened based on the player's operation received from the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b. Can be done. For example, an effect in which a player's operation is intervened is an effect in a variable display game (decoration special figure variable display game) on a display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 2). The character displayed on 41 can be operated, and the identification information in the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 can be stopped.

  Further, on the right side of the option setting unit 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when a player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an operation for discharging a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the game ball 32 supplied from the upper plate 21 by the ball striking device is used as a game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Launch towards (see Figure 2). Further, when the player operates the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b, for example, the volume emitted from the speakers 19a and 19b can be set, or the brightness of the game board 30 can be set. .

Next, the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board according to the first embodiment.
On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game production component) 40 having a display device (variable display device) 41 is arranged at substantially the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so that the game ball does not easily jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 includes, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). In an area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information relating to a game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the presentation effect is displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, on the display screen, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed.

  In addition, a board production device 44 is provided at the top of the center case 40 to produce a game by operating. The board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

  On the left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal symbol start gate (normal start gate) 34 for giving a start condition for the normal variation display game. A game ball won in the usual start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

  In the game area 32, two general winning holes 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40, that is, below the usual start gate 34, and one general winning hole is located on the lower right side of the center case 40. 35 is arranged. The game balls that have won the general prize opening 35 are detected by a prize opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

  Also, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a start opening distribution device 36 (first start winning opening, second start winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition of the special figure variation display game. ing. The start port distributing device 36 includes a start port 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3), a start port 2 switch 37d (see FIG. 3), and a distribution mechanism. The start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37d, The game balls are distributed and guided alternately for each ball. Therefore, the game ball won in the start opening sorting device 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a or the start opening 2 switch 37d.

Further, an ordinary variation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) for providing a start condition of the special figure changing display game is provided on the lower left side of the starting port allocating device 36.
The normal variation winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by opening in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the near side. A closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which a game ball cannot flow is maintained. When the result of the normal variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, a game ball is likely to flow into the normal variation winning device 37 by a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a drive device. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). A game ball won in the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).

Further, an out-out port 30 a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize-winning port or the like is provided below the normal variation winning device 37.
Further, on the left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32 and below the normal start gate 34, the game ball 32 is converted into a state in which a game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A possible special variable winning device (large winning opening) 38 is provided.

  The special variation winning device 38 has a one-blade type opening / closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the left side, and the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the state is converted from a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which the special winning opening is closed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c driven by a large winning port solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, for example, in a special gaming state or in a small hit game. During the state, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of game balls into the big prize opening by converting the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state, and to give a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player It has become. The game balls that have won the special variable winning device 38 are detected by the big winning opening switch 38a (see FIG. 3).

  Further, the center case 40 is provided with a warp port 39a below the special variable winning device 38. The game balls that have flowed into the warp flow path from the warp opening (warp inlet) 39a roll on the stage in the center case 40, and a part thereof is guided to the warp outlet 39b. The warp outlet 39b is located immediately above the start opening sorting device 36, and the game balls guided to the warp exit 39b can easily win the start opening sorting apparatus 36.

  In addition, a point gate 48 and a point indicator 49 are arranged on the lower right side of the start port sorting device 36 in the game area 32. The point gate 48 is provided in the vicinity of the start opening distribution device 36, so that the gaming machine 10 can simultaneously play the opportunity for winning the start opening distribution device 36 and the occurrence of winning for the point gate 48. Can be observed. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can provide the player with the interests of the game by winning the point gate 48 even when the winning to the start opening sorting device 36 is sparse. The interest of the game by winning the point gate 48 contributes to the reduction of the player's feeling of loss and discomfort due to the sparse winning of the winning mouth distribution device 36, and continues to the player. Motivation to play games can be given.

  Further, the point gate 48 is provided at a position where there is no other winning opportunity. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can increase the winning opportunity of the point gate 48. A game ball winning the point gate 48 is detected by a point switch 48a (see FIG. 4). The point indicator 49 is composed of two 7-segment LEDs, and displays the accumulated value of the number of points given when winning detection (passage detection) of the point gate 48 is displayed in two digits. The accumulated value of the number of points is exchanged for a privilege at a predetermined opportunity and given to the player. The privilege given according to the accumulated value of the number of points includes, for example, an increase in choices of production modes. The player can select a desired effect mode by operating the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, among the game areas 32 where the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. It is said that. Then, when the player adjusts the firing force and launches a game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed), the start-port distribution device 36, the normal start-up gate 34, the normal variation winning device 37, and the special variation winning device No. 38 can be aimed at, and no winning can be aimed at by launching a game ball into the right game area (so-called right hit).

  Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is disposed at a position corresponding to the right game area, and the right game area is reached. The game balls thus fired are configured to pass through a flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42.

  Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the general figure start gate 34, which form the special figure fluctuation display game, are provided. There is provided a collective display device 50 for displaying a game of variable display with a win as a trigger and displaying various information.

  The collective display device 50 includes a round display unit 51 composed of LEDs, a special figure 1 hold display part 52, a special figure 1 symbol display part 53, a special figure 2 symbol display part 54, and a universal symbol display part. 55, an ordinary map hold display unit 56, and a state display unit 57.

Next, a game machine control system will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a control system for the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in an integrated manner, and is a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111. A CPU (Central Processing Unit) unit 110 having an input port, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130 are connected. It consists of a data bus 140 and the like.

  The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal resonator. The operating clock of the gaming microcomputer 111, a timer interrupt, and a reference for a random number generation circuit And an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generating a clock. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC (Direct Current) 32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400. Enabled.

  The power supply apparatus 400 is an AC (Alternating Current) -DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V, DC 5V, etc. from the DC 32V voltage. A normal power supply unit 410 having power, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to a RAM (Random Access Memory) in the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit. A control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal for informing the occurrence and recovery of the error.

  In the first embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, Alternatively, it may be provided on the main substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be exchanged when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the first embodiment. By providing the generation unit 430, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing the generation unit 430.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control apparatus 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to, for example, 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When this RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized based on this signal. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B, and a RAM 111C that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area for the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory) may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the contents of the effects, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2, and the variation pattern random number 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include a table for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as the second half fluctuation group table and the second half fluctuation pattern selection table), and the fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern as a pattern (first-half variation group table, first-half variation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is reached, a part of the plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. A display state in which the display result that is derived and displayed satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. And, for example, a state where so-called full rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state where the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, if the change mode is stopped and displayed in the order of left, right, and in order to display the result mode, the left and right change display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display in all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two variable display areas among the left, middle, and right (for example, the same The state that is the identification information (except for the special result mode) may be the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  This reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expectation value is different). As a reach effect, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of “no reach” <“normal reach” <“special 1 reach” <“special 2 reach” <“special 3 reach” <“premier reach”. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device to output the gaming machine 10. Perform overall control. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game (various patterns Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern game execution time in the variable display with reach and non-reach display, hit random numbers for determining the hit of the usual variable display game, etc. And a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds (ms)) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. I have.

  In addition, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (winning (big hit or small hit) or off) or the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure changing display game as the current gaming state. State), the operation state (short-time operation state) of the normal variation winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the starting memory number, etc., and selects one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables. Get. Here, when executing the special figure fluctuation display game, the CPU 111A serves as fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to thereby win a prize ball. Control to pay out. Also, the payout control device 200 controls the payout unit to drive out a payout motor based on a loan request signal from the card unit so as to pay out a rental ball.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine 10, a start port 1 switch 36 a in the start port distribution device 36, and a start port 2 in the normal variation winning device 37. The switches 37a and 37d, the gate switch 34a in the normal start gate 34, the prize opening switch 35a, and the special prize winning apparatus 38 are connected to the big prize opening switch 38a. The high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is low. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 that receives a negative logic signal such as 7V and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V is provided. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected to float. It is possible to detect an abnormal state such as, and output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the output of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switches 37a and 37d, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 38a and the abnormality of the sensor and the switch are detected. The abnormality detection signal 1 output at this time is input to the second input port 123. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal 2 output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal from the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch that detects vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switches 37a and 37d are input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. Yes.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage of, for example, 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

  The data held by the second input port 123 is asserted (changed to an effective level) by enabling the signal CE (Chip Enable) 2 by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. Can be read out. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also includes a fraud radio signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output when the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detects radio waves), a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be received), a payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shot ball cut switch signal (a signal indicating a lack of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on it and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. It has a function of removing noise from the signal. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are temporarily input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. Is configured to do. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. Data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization that is connected to the data bus 140 and a signal indicating the probability status of the jackpot via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal output from the proximity I / F 121, such as a start port switch that does not require any processing, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied to the test firing test apparatus as they are, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that control is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to a port on the relay board 70, and a signal of a port selected and controlled by the chip enable signal CE is supplied to the test test apparatus. Yes.

  The output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and includes a large winning opening solenoid 38b for opening the open / close door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 and a general electric solenoid 37c for opening the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. A second output port 134 for outputting opening / closing data is provided. In addition, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store. Can be supplied to an external device. In addition, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives a switching data signal of the special prize opening solenoid 38b and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal 138a. The second driver 138b for outputting the ON / OFF drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the current of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for the lead-in digit line, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71 Is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 through serial communication. Note that such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 in the same way as a general-purpose microprocessor, so ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, 124 are not provided. Not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the effect control device of the first embodiment.
The effect control device 300 displays a video on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 and the main control microcomputer 311, similarly to the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing for this purpose, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 has a PROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and can retain stored contents even when power is not supplied during a power failure. An FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM) 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 serving as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM 311 a that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, decides the contents of the presentation and instructs the contents of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, lights the decoration lamp, motors And control of solenoid drive control, production time management, and the like.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. Also connected to the VDP 312 is an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM 326 that is used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. Has been.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 and lighting of the decoration lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the interrupt control signals INT0 to n and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  The sound source LSI 314 is connected to an audio ROM 327 that stores audio data. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12, and is generated by the sound source LSI 314. The sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An ornamental special figure holding number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via this command I / F 331 are produced as a production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) and a point display 49 provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the glass frame 15, and provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. Note that a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor that operates an effect device) is provided on the glass frame 15, and a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls the frame effect device is provided. Good.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect agent switch 47 for detecting the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b of the option setting unit 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. (Production motor switch), a function of detecting the on / off state of the point switch 48 a provided in the point gate 48 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume control switch provided in the production control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of 335 and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, and DC5V as the power supply voltage for command I / F 331, a voltage of DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers is generated. Is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. In addition, it is output from the main control microcomputer 311 and supplied to the VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), the tone generator LSI 314 and the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal), and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps, motors and the like. These are reset. In addition, a cooling FAN 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state in which the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, a random number value for determining the hit of the normal game is extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal game start gate 34, and the ROM 111B. Compared with the determination value stored in the table, the process of determining a missed hit of the normal map display game is performed. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the regular symbol display unit 55, a process for displaying a regular symbol variation display game to be stopped is performed. When the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game is a win, a special result mode corresponding to each of the first per stop symbol to the third per stop symbol is displayed on the general symbol display unit 55, and the general electric solenoid 37c. Is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 is controlled to be opened as described above for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the usual figure change display game is out of place, the normal symbol display unit 55 performs control to display the result form of the deviation.

  Further, a start winning (starting memory) is stored based on an input of a game ball detection signal from a starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the starting port allocating device 36, and the first special figure variation display is performed based on the start memory. A game jackpot determination random number value is extracted and compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a miss of the first special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the start memory 2 is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37 and the start port 2 switch 37d provided in the start port sorting device 36. Based on the start-up memory, a random number value for determining the big hit of the second special figure variation display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to perform a process of determining a hit deviation of the second special figure fluctuation display game. .

  Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special symbol 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special symbol 2 symbol display unit 54, processing for displaying a special symbol variation display game to be stopped is performed. In other words, the game in which the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on winning in the start winning area (the first start opening distributing device 36, the normal variable winning device 37) of the game balls flowing down the game area 32. It serves as a control means.

  In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game. Further, the effect control device 300 performs setting of the effect state, output of sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, control of light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode or the small hit result mode in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54. And a process for generating a special game state or a small hit game state (that is, a process for executing a special game or a small hit game) is performed. In the process of generating the special game state or the small hit game state, for example, the CPU 111A can open the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable prize device 38 by the big prize opening solenoid 38b and allow the game ball to flow into the big prize opening. To control. Then, until the condition that either a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins the grand prize winning opening or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the big winning opening is achieved. The control (cycle game) is performed in which the release is set as one round and this is repeated (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a big prize opening / closing control means for performing control for opening and closing the big prize opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. When the result of the special figure variation display game is out of control, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of any of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a short time state (a specific game state, a normal figure high probability state) as a game state after the special game state ends, based on a result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this short state, the probability that the hit result of the normal map change display game (normal map probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal low probability state) of 0 (normal high probability state). Is possible. As a result, control is performed such that the opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is longer than when the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal low probability state. Here, in the normal variation winning device 37 in this embodiment, the normal probability is set to “0” so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

  Also, in the short time state, the execution time of the normal map change display game (the normal map change time) is, for example, 500 milliseconds, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game is, for example, 600 milliseconds. When the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal variation display game being won, the first stop symbol opening time (general power opening time) and the number of releases (for example, 500 msec × 1), Opening time (general power opening time) of the second per stop symbol and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 msec × 2 times), opening time of the third per stop symbol (opening time of the general power) and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 ms ×) 3 times).

  In addition, the execution time of the general map variable display game, the normal map stop time, the number of general power releases, and the general power open time are set appropriately so as to control the normal variable prize winning game 37 and the normal variable winning device 37 to be in the short-time operation state. For example, in the short-time state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-described normal variation display game (ordinary variation time) to be the second variation display time shorter than the first variation display time. (For example, 10,000 milliseconds is 1000 milliseconds). Further, in the short time state, it is possible to control the general map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game so as to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 milliseconds). 704 ms). Also, in the short-time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal-variation display game being won, the opening time (general power open time) is set to the normal state (low-probability state) It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than the one opening time (for example, 100 milliseconds is 1352 milliseconds). Further, in the short-time state, the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of normal power release) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times of opening (for example, 4 times) as the second opening number. Also, in the short-time state, the probability that the hit result of the normal-variable display game (normal-probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal low-probability state, for example 1/251) in the normal operation state. Probability (usually high probability state, eg 250/251) is possible.

  In the short-time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of times of normal power release, the normal power release time, and the normal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-short states that are different from each other. Moreover, when it is a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously, or only one of them can be generated.

  Next, the configuration of the collective display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example of the collective display device according to the first embodiment. The collective display device 50 includes 7 segments LED_d1, 7 segments LED_d2, and 16 LEDs from LED_d3 to LED_d18. The collective display device 50 displays various states according to lighting states of the 7-segment LED_d1, the 7-segment LED_d2, and the LED_d3 to LED_d18.

  The collective display device 50 distributes various state display functions from the 7-segment LED_d1, the 7-segment LED_d2, and the LED_d3 to the LED_d18, so that the round display unit 51, the special figure 1 hold display part 52, and the special figure 1 symbol display part 53 are arranged. A special symbol 2 symbol display unit 54, a general symbol display unit 55, a general symbol hold display unit 56, a state display unit 57, and a special symbol 2 hold display unit 58. The round display unit 51 displays the number of rounds in the special game according to the lighting state of the four LEDs LED_d3 to LED_d6. The special figure 1 hold display unit 52 displays the number of holds in the special figure 1 game by lighting the two LEDs LED_d11 and LED_d12. The special figure 1 symbol display section 53 displays the symbols in the special figure 1 game by lighting the eight LEDs of the seven segment LED_d1 (seven segment LEDs and one dot LED). The special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 displays the symbols in the special figure 2 game by lighting the eight LEDs of the seven segment LED_d2 (seven segment LEDs and one dot LED). The regular symbol display unit 55 displays symbols in the regular symbol game by lighting the three LEDs LED_d8, LED_d10, and LED_d18. The usual figure hold display unit 56 displays the number of holds in the usual figure game by lighting the two LEDs LED_d15 and LED_d16. The state display unit 57 displays the gaming state in the special game according to the lighting state of the three LEDs LED_d7, LED_d9, and LED_d17. The special figure 2 hold display unit 58 displays the number of holds in the special figure 2 game by lighting the two LEDs LED_d13 and LED_d14.

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 10 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 milliseconds).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. FIG. 6 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the main process according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 7 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of the main process according to the first embodiment. The main process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

  The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, first, the process of prohibiting the interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area in which the value of the register or the like is saved when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the first embodiment, the address range of the RAM 111C is 0000h to 01FFh, and the upper order is 00h or 01h. In step S4, 00h at the head of the address range of the RAM 111C is set.

  Next, a firing stop signal is output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and a process for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, slave control means (for example, the payout control apparatus 200 or the effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program to start normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

  In addition, the power-on delay timer is timed using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not subject to the validity determination (checksum calculation) of the data held in the RAM area. Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 can be performed. It can be detected reliably. That is, when the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or until the standby time elapses after the power is turned on. 112 needs to be operated continuously. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

  Next, a process of setting a power-on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds) (step S7) is performed, and then a process of monitoring the standby time and the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12). To do. First, the number of times (for example, twice) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on is determined. A determination is made (step S9).

  When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination (step S9) of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, it waits for the power to the gaming machine 10 to be cut off. . In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and to appropriately deal with problems at power-on be able to.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that until the end of the standby time, access to the RAM 111C is not permitted, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to take a backup of the RAM 111C, and the control burden can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by “−1” (step S11), and the timer value is “0”. Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). When the timer value is “0” (step S12; Y), that is, when the standby time is over, access to a read / write RWM (Read Write Memory) such as the RAM 111C or EEPROM is permitted (step S12). S13), off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state in which there is no output) (step S14).

  Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in the first embodiment) is set (step S15). It is determined whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on from the state of the first input port 122 read in advance (step S16).

  When the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF (step S16; N), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S16). If it is normal (step S17; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19). It is determined whether or not the checksums match (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 (FIG. 7), and processing is performed when normal recovery from a power failure is performed.

  Further, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N). ), If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 (FIG. 7) to perform initialization processing. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. To make it possible.

  In step S21 (FIG. 7), the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Undefined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined. Thereafter, an area for storing the game state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the special figure has a high probability (the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state) (step S22). Here, when the special figure is not in high probability (step S22; N), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. On the other hand, when the special figure is in a high probability (step S22; Y), the on-information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and for example, a high probability notification LED (error display) provided in the collective display device 50 is saved. Data) is saved in the segment area (step S24). And the command at the time of the power failure restoration corresponding to the process number prepared in order to perform the special figure game process mentioned later reasonably is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (step S25), and step S31 Proceed to In the case of the first embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command (a customer waiting demonstration screen command, Otherwise, send multiple commands such as recovery screen commands). Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, performance number information and high probability number information are transmitted.

  On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to the access permitted (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to zero (step S27), and the RAM access prohibition area is set to access prohibition (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. And the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (step S30), and it transfers to step S31. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed and A plurality of commands such as time (for example, a command for informing the RAM initialization with light and sound) are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, performance number information and high probability number information are transmitted.

  In step S31, processing for starting a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit)) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal, and And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for setting the activation of the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit to a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. A bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. Bit transposition pattern is a method of permutation when the extracted random bit arrangement (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) is replaced in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random numbers according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random numbers can be broken and the confidentiality of the random numbers can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

  After that, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on is extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of the first embodiment, the special symbol hit pattern is determined) RWM as the initial value (start value) of random numbers (big hit design random numbers, small hit design random numbers), random numbers that determine the hit of the normal figure (per random number), random numbers that determine the hit pattern of the normal figure (per hit design random number) Is saved in a predetermined area (step S33), and an interrupt is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the first embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register is changed every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as an initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. ), It is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S35) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and destroy the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the first embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are generated using random numbers generated by a random number generation circuit. Configured to generate. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU. The big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, This is a “low-speed counter” that is updated based on a CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) for timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing that is a processing unit. In addition, in the big hit design random number, the small hit design random number, the hit random number, and the hit design random number, each time the random number makes a round, each initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value. Is adopted. Each random number may be updated by a counter using “+1” or “−1”, or may be updated by a random method in which all values within a range appear without being overlapped until one round is completed. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit bonus random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times (for example, twice) of reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S36). It is determined whether the signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed preferentially. Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  The initial value random number update process in step S35 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process, and when such a method is adopted, In order to avoid executing the initial value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update it to release the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed as in the embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process, This has the advantage that the main process is simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination (step S37) of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S39), all Processing for outputting off data to the output port is performed (step S40).

  Thereafter, the power failure inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection region 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection region 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum when the RWM is turned off and a process for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area (step S44), access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the process (step S45), it waits for the power of the gaming machine to be cut off. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shut down is properly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. Etc.), the main control means, when turning on the power, delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined waiting time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device (game control) Device 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) has the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit being operated. And an initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation state of the initialization means before the start of the waiting time.

Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.
[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating the checksum calculation process according to the first embodiment. This checksum calculation process is a checksum calculation process (steps S19 and S43) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of the RAM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step S101), and the number of repetitions is set (step S102). Here, the number of repetitions is the number of bytes of the RAM used. Next, “0” is set as the calculated value (step S103).

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step S104), the calculated address is updated by “+1” (step S105), and the repetition number is updated by “−1” (step S106). ), It is determined whether or not the checksum calculation has been completed (step S107). If the calculation has not been completed (step S107; N), the process returns to step S104 and the above process is repeated. If the calculation is completed (step S107; Y), the checksum calculation process ends.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of initial value random number update processing according to the first embodiment. This initial value random number update process is the initial value random number update process (step S35) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by “+1” (step S111), the small hit symbol initial value random number is updated by “+1” (step S112), and the hit initial value random number is changed to “+1”. Is updated (step S113), and the winning symbol initial value random number is updated by "+1" (step S114), and the initial value random number update process is terminated. Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure, and the “small hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that determines the small hit symbol stop symbol of the special figure It is a random number that becomes the initial value of. Also, the “hit initial value random number” is a random number that is the initial value of a random number that determines the hit of the normal variation game, and the “hit symbol initial value random number” is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit symbol of the normal variation game Is a random number. The small hit design random number does not exist in a model without small hits, and the hit design initial value random number may not exist depending on the model. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing in the above-described main processing will be described. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment. This timer interrupt process is an interrupt process that occurs during the period from when the interrupt is permitted until the interrupt is prohibited (steps S34 to S39) in the main process described above. The timer interrupt process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

  The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and timer interrupt processing is started.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S121). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register saving process in which a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) is transferred to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S122). In step S122, the same process as step S4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing (step S123) is performed to input from various sensors and switches and to acquire signals, that is, to read the state of each input port. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S124) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoid 38b, general electric solenoid 37c) and the like is performed. In addition, when the signal for stopping the emission is output in step S5 in the main process, the output permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the emission permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating a launch permission state viewed from the game control device 100, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating a launch permission state viewed from the payout control device 200. Is also generated in the payout control device 200 and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step S125), a random number update process 1 (step S126), and a random number update process 2 (step S127) for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control apparatus 200 are performed. Thereafter, it is monitored whether there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switches 37a and 37d, the usual gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 38a, A prize opening switch / status monitoring process (step S128) for monitoring (whether the front frame or the glass frame is not opened, etc.) is performed. Also, a special figure game process (step S129) for performing a process relating to the special figure variation display game and a general figure game process (step S130) for performing a process relating to the common figure variation display game are performed.

  Next, a segment LED editing process (step S131) that is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED that displays special information variation display game and various information related to the game to display desired contents, and the magnetic sensor 61. Fraud monitoring process to check whether there is any abnormality by checking the detection signal from the board (step S132), fraudulent board radio wave to check the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and determine whether there is any abnormality A monitoring process (step S133) is performed. Then, external information editing processing (step S134) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

  Here, in the first embodiment, the process for restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process for allowing the interrupt) and the process for restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process for designating the register bank 0) are interrupted. Automatically performed on return (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, there is a gaming machine that needs to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step S123) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of input processing according to the first embodiment.

  In this input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S141). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S142), and the state of the read input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S142). S143). Next, an address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S144), an address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S145), and unused bit data is prepared (step S146). Unused bit data and bit data to be inverted are prepared for each input port. Next, bit data to be inverted is prepared (step S147), and switch reading processing (step S148) is performed. Here, “preparation” in the first embodiment means setting a value in a register, but is not limited thereto, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.

  Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S149), the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S150), and unused bit data is prepared ( Step S151), bit data to be inverted is prepared (Step S152). Then, a switch reading process (step S153) is performed, and the input process is terminated.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the switches monitored by the first input port 122 include a glass frame opening detection switch 63, a body frame opening detection switch 64, a RAM initialization switch 112 (unused in this process), There are a power failure monitoring signal (unused in this process) generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400, a payout abnormality status signal, a shot ball break switch signal, an overflow switch signal, and a touch switch. As switches to be monitored by the second input port 123, the start port 1 switch 36a (“start port 1 winning signal”), the start port 2 switches 37a and 37d (“start port 2 winning signal” “normal electric combination by pattern branching”). Output 1 as an object 1 winning signal 1), a winning opening switch 35a ("ordinary winning opening winning signal"), a large winning opening switch 38a ("special electric accessory 1 winning signal") and a gate switch 34a ("normal symbol 1"). 1)). The switches monitored by the third input port 124 include a panel radio wave sensor 62, a switch abnormality detection signal, a magnetic sensor 61, a frame radio wave illegal signal, and a payout busy signal.

[Switch read processing]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps S148 and S153) in the above-described input process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating the switch reading process according to the first embodiment. In this switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S161). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S162), and the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S163), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area Is saved (stored) (step S164). Thereafter, it waits for the delay time (about 100 μs) until the second reading to elapse (step S165).

  When the delay time (about 100 μs) elapses, a second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step S166). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S167), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S168), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area Is saved (stored) (step S169). After that, a definite bit pattern in which the same bit is 1 in the first and second readings and a different bit is 0 is created (step S170), and a logical product of the definite bit pattern and port input state 2 is calculated. The confirmation bit is set (step S171).

  Next, an undetermined bit pattern is created by setting the same bit in the first and second readings to 0 and different bits to 1 (step S172), and the logic between the undetermined bit pattern and the final state at the previous interrupt. The product is taken and used as the previous retained bit (step S173). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the current fixed bit and the previous held bit are combined and saved as the current finalized state (step S174), the exclusive OR of the previous time and the current finalized state is taken and saved as the rising edge (step S175), The switch reading process ends.

  In addition, when the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt processing, and the signal changes by comparing the result with the previous reading. There is a method of determining whether or not the switch has been made. However, if the switch state read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, the correct determination may not be performed. On the other hand, as described in the first embodiment, it is possible to avoid the above problems by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference. Become.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S124) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of output processing according to the first embodiment. In this output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the third output port 135 (see FIG. 3) that outputs the segment data of the batch display device 50 (step S181). Next, the data to be output to the second output port 134 that outputs the data of the ordinary electric solenoid 37c and the big prize opening solenoid 38b is synthesized and output (step S182).

  Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device 50 is updated by “+1” in the range of “0” to “3” (step S183), and the digit of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter Line output data is acquired (step S184). Here, as an example of dynamically turning on LED_d18 from 7-segment LED_d1 and 7-segment LED_d2 and LED_d3 of collective display device 50, round display, special figure 1 hold display, special figure 1 symbol display, special figure 2 symbol display, general figure There are symbol display, general figure hold display, and state display (game state display such as short time state and high probability state).

  Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S185), and the combined data is output to the fourth output port 136 for digit output and the fifth output port 137 for output of external information (step S186). The external information synthesized in step S185 is “door / frame open” and “security signal”.

  Thereafter, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S187), and the loaded data is output to the third output port 135 for segment output (step S188).

  Subsequently, various output data of external information to be output to the external information terminal board 71 is loaded and combined (step S189). The external information to be synthesized here includes “hit signal 1”, “hit signal 2”, “hit signal 3”, “hit signal 4”, “symbol determined number signal”, “start-up signal”, “main prize ball” Signal "and the like. Next, the synthesized data and the output data for permission to fire are synthesized (step S190), and the synthesized data are output to the fifth output port 137 for outputting external information and for outputting the permission permission signal (step S191).

  Next, the data to be output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S192). Thereafter, the data output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S193).

  Next, the data to be output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S194). Further, the data to be output is loaded and synthesized to the test signal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus, and the synthesized data is outputted to the test signal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( Step S195). Then, the data output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S196) and the output process is terminated.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S125) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a payout command transmission process according to the first embodiment. In this figure, the left column is a process for updating (increasing) the number of outputs of the main prize ball signal, and the right column is a process for transmitting a payout command.

  In the payout command transmission process, first, each of the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of prize balls (for example, three prize balls, ten prize balls, and 14 prize balls), which is to be checked. It is determined whether or not there is a count number other than “0” in the winning number counter area 2 storing up to 255 winnings (step S201). If there is no count number (step S201; N), the address of the winning counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S202), and whether or not the counting of all the winning counter areas has been checked. Is determined (step S203).

  If it is determined in step S201 that there is a count number (step S201; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted ("-1" is updated) (step S204). The number of payouts corresponding to the address is acquired (step S205). Next, the value in the prize ball remaining area and the number of payouts are added (step S206), the addition result is saved in the prize ball remaining area (step S207), and 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S208). It is determined whether the subtraction result is “0” or more (step S209). If it is determined in step S209 that the subtraction result is equal to or greater than “0” (step S209; Y), the main prize ball signal output count is updated by “+1” (step S210), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining area. (Step S211). Here, as a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal), one pulse is output from the main board (game control device 100) for every 10 payout schedules, and 10 payouts are issued from the payout board (payout control device 200). One pulse is output every time.

  Next, it is determined in step S203 that all checks have been completed (step S203; Y), or in step S209, it is determined that the subtraction result is not greater than “0” (step S209; Y). If the value of the payout command transmission timer is not “0”, the value of the payout command transmission timer is updated by “−1” (step S212). If the payout command transmission process is the first timer interrupt process, the initial value set in the last step S221 of the payout command transmission process is not set, so the value of the payout command transmission timer is “0”. Therefore, no subtraction is performed. In this way, the payout command is not sent every timer interrupt, but is sent after a predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, the payout command is transmitted under the condition that the payout control board can pay out the winning ball.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout command transmission timer is “0” (step S213). When the value of the payout command transmission timer is determined to be “0” (step S213; Y), It is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is busy (step S214). Whether or not the payout busy signal is busy is determined not by referring to the state of the port but by referring to the payout busy signal flag. Here, the conditions that the payout busy signal is turned on (busy) are as follows: “Payout operation”, “Ball lending operation”, “Shoot ball breakage error”, “Overflow error”, “Frame radio wave fraud "In", "Dispensing ball detection switch is abnormal (switch that monitors the dispensed ball)", "Insufficient payout error", "Excessive payout error", "Prize to be paid out in the memory of the payout control board" When there is a count of the number of balls (the number of unpaid prize balls = the number of game balls remaining) (when not = 0).

  Next, when the payout busy signal is not busy (step S214; N), it is determined whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215), and if there is no count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215). N), the address of the winning counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S216), and it is determined whether or not all areas have been checked (step S217). If all areas have not been checked (step S217; N), the process returns to step S215.

  In step S215, when there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215; Y), the target winning number counter is updated by "-1" (step S218), and the number of payouts corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 1 is updated. The command is acquired (step S219), and the acquired command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S220). Then, an initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S221).

  When it is determined in step S213 that the value of the payout command transmission timer is not “0” (step S213; N), the payout busy signal is determined to be busy (step S214; Y) in step S214. In step S217, when it is determined that all areas have been checked (step S217; Y), or when the process of step S221 is completed, the payout command transmission process is terminated.

[Random number update process 1]
Next, the random number update process 1 (step S126) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the random number update process 1 according to the first embodiment. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number that are the targets of the initial value random number update process.

  In this random number update process 1, it is first determined whether or not the normal jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S231). When the usual big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S231; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S234). Also, when the usual big hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S231; Y), the big hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S232), and the next big hit big symbol symbol random number is loaded next time. Is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S233). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the small hit design random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S234).

  If the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S234; N), it is determined whether the hit random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S237). If the small hit symbol random number is waiting for initial value setting (step S234; Y), the small hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S235), and the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is set. Is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number region) (step S236). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the winning random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S237).

  If the winning random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S237; N), it is determined whether or not the winning design random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S240). If the winning random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S237; Y), the winning initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S238), and the next initial value of the loaded winning random number is set to the corresponding random number counter ( It is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the random number area (step S239). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the winning design random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S240).

  If the winning design random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S240; N), the random number update processing 1 is terminated. If the winning design random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S240; Y), the winning design random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S241), and the next initial value of the loaded winning design random number corresponds. A register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the random number counter (random number area) is set (step S242), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
Next, the random number update process 2 (step S127) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the random number update processing 2 according to the first embodiment. This random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variation pattern random number 2, variation pattern random number 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variation pattern random number 1) as the variation pattern random numbers. In the case of No. 2, both are set as update targets, and each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at the time of different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (reach variation mode determining random number) by the random number update processing 2 executed in one interrupt processing for the main processing is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is comprised so that.

  In this random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for designating in order which random number of a plurality of random numbers to be updated is the target of the current update process is changed from “0” to “3”. The range is updated (step S251). Next, the address of the production random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S252). Then, a random number upper limit determination value is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S253). The table to be referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

  Subsequently, for example, a random counter such as a counter (hereinafter referred to as an M1 counter) used for DRAM refresh or the like provided in the Z80 microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer 111 in the first embodiment. The value of the counter for which a correct value is set is loaded (step S254). By using the value of the M1 counter, randomness can be given to the random number. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S255). The mask value is a bit number that varies depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated. When the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256). Then, if the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256; Y), the remaining value by masking the value of the M1 counter with the upper 1 byte as the addition value using the mask value (hereinafter, this is masked). Is set to a mask update value obtained by adding “1” to “0”, the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step S257), and the process proceeds to step S259. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” as the addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value (step S258). ), The process proceeds to step S259. Note that “1” is added to the masked value because the masked value may be “0”, and if “0” is added later, it does not change from the value before the addition, so this is avoided. is there.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S259). If it is a 2-byte random number (step S259; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set ( Step S260) and the process proceeds to Step S262. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S259; N), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random value, and the value of the random number area to be updated (1 byte) as the lower 1 byte of the random value. Is set (step S261), and the process proceeds to step S262.

  In step S262, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step S257 or S258 to the random value is set as a new random value, and it is determined whether or not the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step S253. (Step S263). If the new random value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step S263; N), the new random value is saved in the random number area below the 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step S265). If the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S263; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random value is set as a new new random value (step S264), and this value is 1 byte. Save in the random number area below the random number or the 2-byte random number (step S265).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S266). If the updated random number is not a 2-byte random number (step S266; N), the random number update processing 2 is terminated. If it is a 2-byte random number (step S266; Y), a new random value (or a value when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the upper random number area of the 2-byte random number (step S267). Then, the random number update process 2 is finished.

  In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of FIG. 1 and FIG. Therefore, the CPU 111A displays the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game balls into the starting area of the starting opening sorting device 36 and the normal variation winning device 37. Random number updating means for updating the random number of the variation pattern for determination is made.

[Prize mouth switch / status monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S128) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a winning opening switch / state monitoring process according to the first embodiment. In the winning mouth switch / status monitoring process, first, a winning mouth monitoring table (for example, a port to which a detection signal from a count switch is input) corresponding to the big winning mouth switch 38a in the big winning mouth (special variable winning device 38). And data indicating the bit position in the port of the signal and the like are stored) (step S271). Next, a fraud & winning monitoring process (step S272) is performed to monitor whether there are frauds (illegal prizes) to be awarded to the big prize opening even though the big prize opening is not open, and to detect normal winnings. .

  Thereafter, a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other large winning opening switch 38a in the large winning opening (special variable winning apparatus 38) is prepared (step S273), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning and a normal winning is made. The detected fraud & prize winning monitoring process (step S274) is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the ordinary electric power system is prepared (step S275), and an illegal & winning monitoring process for monitoring whether there is an illegal winning and detecting a normal winning ( Step S276) is executed.

  Next, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (in this case, the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that does not require fraud monitoring processing is prepared (step S277), and the winning number is updated. Number counter update processing (step S278) is performed.

  Next, the value of the state scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored for the error state of the gaming machine 10 is the current monitoring target is “0”. To “3” (step S279). Thereafter, according to the value of the state scan counter, any one of the switch abnormality 1 error output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the connector of the switch, the shot blowout error from the dispensing control device 200, the overflow error from the overflow switch, and the dispensing abnormality error A gaming machine state monitoring table 1 is prepared for setting the monitoring of errors based on kana (step S280). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S281) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

  Next, according to the value of the state scan counter, a gaming machine state monitoring table 2 is prepared for setting an error monitoring based on any of the glass frame opening, the body frame opening, the frame radio wave fraud and the touch switch. (Step S282). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S283) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the status scan counter is “0” (step S284). If the value of the status scan counter is not “0” (step S284; N), the winning prize switch / status monitoring is performed. The process ends. In this case, the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred next does not have a gaming machine state monitoring target. Further, when the value of the state scan counter is “0” (step S284; Y), the gaming machine state based on the switch abnormality 2 error output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like according to the value of the state scan counter A gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is set for setting the target of monitoring (step S285). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S286) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed, a payout busy signal check process (step S287) is performed, and the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is terminated. The payout busy signal check process is not performed every time, but is executed once every four times, and the remaining three times are passed, so the monitoring is performed with a period of 16 ms.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
Next, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process (steps S272, S274, S276) in the winning mouth switch / status monitoring process (see FIG. 17) will be described. FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of fraud & prize winning monitoring processing according to the first embodiment. Each winning mouth monitoring table prepared in the winning mouth switch / error monitoring process includes “data for determining whether there is an input (monitoring switch bit)”, “lower address of fraud monitoring information”, “illegal prize” "Lower address of number area", "Unauthorized winning error notification command", "Unauthorized winning number upper limit (number of fraud occurrence determination)", "Award switch table address" and "Notification timer update information (permission / update)" Assume that information is defined.

  This fraud & prize winning monitoring process is a process performed for the large prize opening switch 38a of the special variable prize winning device 38 and the start opening 2 switch 37a of the normal variable prize winning device 37. With regard to the big prize opening (special variable prize winning device 38) and the ordinary electric power (ordinary variable prize winning device 37), since it is easy to be fraudulently forcibly opening the opening / closing member and inserting the game ball to pay out the winning ball, In addition to monitoring fraud.

  In the fraud & winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning mouth switch subject to gaming machine state monitoring is checked (step S291), and it is determined whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S292). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the special variable prize winning device 38 is opened when the prize opening switch to be monitored for the gaming machine state is the big prize opening switch 38a. Further, when the winning opening switch to be monitored for the gaming machine state is the start opening 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variation winning apparatus 37 is being executed based on the hit of the usual figure.

  If it is the fraud monitoring period (step S292; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target prize opening switch (step S293). If there is no input to the target prize opening switch (step S293; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S302). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S293; Y), the number of the target illegal winnings is updated by “+1” (step S294), and the number of illegal winnings after the addition is the number of fraud determinations to be monitored ( For example, it is determined whether or not the number is 5 or more (step S295).

  Note that the number of determinations is five because, for example, when a large winning opening in an open state is converted to a closed state, a game ball is sandwiched between door members of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball is valid for the count switch period. This is to prevent the player from immediately determining that the player has won a prize or that the signal is noisy when the prize is passed. As a result, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized determination from being easily made until it is not necessarily illegal.

  If it is not equal to or greater than the determined number (step S295; N), a winning monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S300). If the number is equal to or greater than the determination number (step S295; Y), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the fraud determination number (step S296), and the initial value is saved in the target fraud winning notification timer area (step S297). Next, a target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step S298), a fraud winning flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step S299), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S310). ).

  On the other hand, if it is not the fraud monitoring period (step S292; N), a winning monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S300), and a winning number counter updating process (step S301) for setting a winning ball is performed. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S302), and whether or not the notification timer is permitted to be updated is determined (step S303). Then, when the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step S303; N), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process ends. Note that information that is not permitted to update the notification timer includes a big prize opening switch 38a. This is because one large winning opening is monitored with two switches. If the timer is updated by monitoring both switches, the timer is updated at double speed, and as a result, the illegal timer times out in half of the specified time. In order to avoid such timer updating, updating at the timing of the big prize opening switch that performs the monitoring process first is prohibited. Further, when update of the notification timer is permitted (step S303; Y) as in the case of the big winning opening switch that performs the monitoring process later and the start opening 2 switch 37a of the normal variation winning apparatus 37, the target notification timer is “0”. Otherwise, “−1” is updated (step S304). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to “0”.

  The update of the notification timer is permitted when the prize opening switch subject to gaming machine state monitoring is one of the big prize opening switches 38a, and when the prize opening switch subject to gaming machine state monitoring is the other big prize opening switch 38a. Is not allowed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification timer from being updated twice as much as the unauthorized notification about the special variation winning device 38, and to be up in half of the specified time (for example, 60000 ms). Note that the update of the notification timer is always permitted when the winning opening switch to be monitored for the gaming machine state is the big winning opening switch 38a or the start opening 2 switch 37a.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the notification timer is “0” (step S305). If the value is not “0” (step S305; N), that is, if the time has not expired, fraud & winning monitoring is performed. The process ends. If the value is “0” (step S305; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, a target fraud cancel command is prepared (step S306), and the fraud winning release flag is set as the fraud flag. Is prepared (step S307). Then, the CPU 111A determines whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes “0” (step S308).

  When it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes “0” (step S308; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes “0” in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, Clear (step S309), and compare the prepared illegal flag with the value of the target illegal flag area (step S310). If the notification timer value is not “0” (step S308; N), that is, if the notification timer value is “0” in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is prepared. Is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (step S310).

  Then, if the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S310; Y), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared illegal flag does not match the value of the target illegal flag area (step S310; N), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the target illegal flag area (step S311), and the production command setting process is performed (step S311). Step S312), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. Through the above process, the fraud notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when fraud occurs, and the illegal prize fraud cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 along with the fraud cancellation, and the start and end of fraud notification are set. Will be.

[Winner counter update process]
Next, the winning number counter update processing (steps S278 and S301) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the winning number counter updating process according to the first embodiment. It should be noted that the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table prepared in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process includes “repetition count” information and “data for determining whether or not there is an input” defined for each switch. (Monitor switch bit) ”,“ Lower address of the winning number counter area 1 ”and“ Lower address of the winning number counter area 2 ”are defined.

  In this winning number counter updating process, first, the number of winning port switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning port monitoring table (step S321), and whether or not there is an input to the target winning port switch (more precisely, an input change). Is determined (step S322).

  If there is no input (step S322; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S331). If there is an input (step S322; Y), the value of the target prize counter area 1 is loaded (step S323), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step S324), and it is determined whether an overflow occurs. (Step S325). If no overflow has occurred (step S325; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S326). As a result, the winning number counter for the winning ball (sending command transmission) is updated. The counter size at this time is 2 bytes, and is updated in the range of “0” to “65535”. If an overflow has occurred (step S325; Y), the process of step S326 is passed.

  Next, the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S327), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step S328), and it is determined whether or not it overflows (step S329). If no overflow has occurred (step S329; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S330). Thereby, the winning number counter for the main winning ball signal is updated. The counter size at this time is 1 byte, and is updated in the range of “0” to “255”. If an overflow has occurred (step S329; Y), the process of step S330 is passed.

  In step S331, when the table address is updated to the address of the next record, it is determined whether or not monitoring of all the switches has been completed (step S332). If all the switches have not been monitored (step S332; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S322). When monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S332; Y), the winning number counter updating process is terminated. With the above processing, a winning ball corresponding to the winning is set.

[Game machine status check processing]
Next, the gaming machine state check process (step S286) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process will be described. FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the gaming machine state check process according to the first embodiment. Each gaming machine status monitoring table prepared in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process includes “the lower address of the start address of the status monitoring area” and “the port of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored. "Lower address of the input status area", "Mask data to extract only the bit of the target signal", "Signal ON judgment data", "Status OFF command (in the case of error system, meaning of error notification end command)", Information of “status on command (meaning error notification start command in case of error system)”, “status off monitoring timer comparison value”, and “status on monitoring timer comparison value” is defined respectively.

  In this gaming machine state check process, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is acquired (step S341), and it is determined whether or not the monitoring target signal is on, that is, whether or not it is in a state indicating an error. Determination is made (step S342). The case where the signal to be monitored is not on means that the error system is a normal state that is not an error, and the touch switch is a state that is not touched. Further, the case where the signal to be monitored is ON means an error (abnormal or illegal) state with respect to an error system, and a touch state with respect to a touch switch.

  In step S342, if the signal is not on (step S342; N), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step S343), and a target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S344). Thereafter, a target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S345), and the value of the target signal control region is compared with the current signal state (step S349).

  On the other hand, if the signal is on (step S342; Y), a state on flag is prepared as a state flag (step S346), and a target state on command is acquired and prepared (step S347). Thereafter, a target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S348), and the value of the target signal control region is compared with the current signal state (step S349).

  If the value of the target signal control area matches the current signal state (step S349; Y), that is, if the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by “+1” (step S352). ), It is determined whether or not the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353). If the value of the target signal control area does not match the current signal state (step S349; N), that is, if the signal state changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area. (Step S350). Then, the target state monitoring timer is cleared (step S351), the target state monitoring timer is updated by “+1” (step S352), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value. (Step S353).

  When the value of the target state monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353; N), this gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353; Y), the state monitoring timer is updated by "-1" and kept at the value of "comparison value -1" (step S354). The prepared state flag is compared with the value of the target state flag region (step S355).

  When the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (step S355; Y), the gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area do not match (step S355; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S356), and the state prepared above is turned off. An effect command setting process for transmitting either a command or a state on command is performed (step S357), and the gaming machine state check process is terminated.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
Next, the payout busy signal check process (step S287) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process will be described. FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the payout busy signal check process according to the first embodiment.

  In this payout busy signal check process, it is first determined whether or not the payout busy signal is on (step S361). If the payout busy signal is not on (step S361; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag ( In step S362), an OFF confirmation monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S363). For example, 32 ms is set as the OFF confirmation monitoring timer comparison value set here.

  In step S361, when the payout busy signal is on (step S361; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S364), and an on confirmation monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S365). For example, 32 ms is set as the ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value set here.

  Next, the value of the busy signal state area is compared with the state of the current signal (step S366). When the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S366; Y), that is, when the signal state has not changed, the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by “+1” (step S369). It is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (step S370). If the value of the busy signal state area does not match the state of the current signal (step S366; N), that is, if the state of the signal changes, the state of the current signal is saved in the busy signal state area ( Step S367). Then, the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to zero (step S368), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S369), and it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (step S370). ).

  If the value of the busy signal monitoring timer has not reached the timer comparison value (step S370; N), the payout busy signal check process is terminated. If the value of the busy signal monitoring timer becomes equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (step S370; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by "-1" and kept at the value of "comparison value -1" (step S371). The prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S372), and the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, details of the special game process (step S129) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of special figure game processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switches 37a and 37d are monitored, the whole process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set. In the special game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switches 37a and 37d is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins a game in the start port sorting device 36 that forms the first start winning port and the normal variable winning device 37 that forms the second start winning port, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) Extraction is performed, and a game result pre-determination is performed in which the game result based on the winning is determined in advance at the stage before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the winning.

  Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this special winning opening switch monitoring process, processing for monitoring the detection of a game ball at the special winning opening switch 38a (large winning opening switch 1, large winning opening switch 2) provided in the special variable winning apparatus 38 is performed.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game process timer is “0” (step A4). When the value of the special figure game process timer is “0” (step A4; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game process number (step A7).

  In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the production, A special figure routine process (step A8) for setting information necessary for the process is performed.

  In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “1”, special figure changing process for setting the special figure stop display time, setting information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step A9) is performed.

  In step A7, if the special figure game process number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of the big hit, and the big winning opening for each big hit A special chart display process (step A10) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the release pattern and setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process.

  In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “3”, setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, updating of the number of opening, setting of information necessary for executing the processing during the opening of the special winning opening are performed. Processing during fanfare / interval (step A11) is performed.

  In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “4”, if the big hit round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the ending command is set, A special winning opening opening process (step A12) for performing processing for setting information necessary for performing ball processing, etc. is performed.

  In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is “5”, if the big hit round is not the final round, information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing is set, while the round is the final round. Processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening, setting of information necessary for performing the big hit end processing, etc. is performed (step A13).

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “6”, a big hit end process (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure routine process is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “7”, in order to perform the process of setting the opening time / opening pattern of the big winning opening when the small hit occurs, setting the fanfare command, and the process during the small hit A small hitting fanfare process (step A15) for setting necessary information and the like is performed.

  In step A7, if the special figure game process number is “8”, the setting of the information required for performing the small hit action moving process, the small hit end screen command, the small hit remaining ball process, etc. The small hitting process to be performed (step A16) is performed.

If the special figure game process number is “9” in step A7, the small hit remaining ball process (step A17) is performed for setting information necessary for performing the small hit end process.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “10”, a small hit end process (step A18) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure routine process is performed.

  Then, after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special symbol 1 symbol display part 53 (step A19), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process (step A20) which concerns on the special symbol 1 symbol display part 53 is performed. And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 2 symbol display part 54 (step A21), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A22) which concerns on the special figure 2 symbol display part 54 is performed, and a special figure game process Exit. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game process timer is not “0” in step A4 (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do it.

  Note that the small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (actual accessory continuous operation device is operated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on / off in software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. In addition, the “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term having a meaning.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the start port switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment.

  In the start port switch monitoring process, first, a start port 1 (start port distribution device 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed, and a winning at the starting port 1 is performed. It is determined whether or not there is (step A103).

If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning at the start port 1 (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning at the start port 1 (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing is being shortened (medium power support is in progress) (step A104). . Note that the determination in step A104 is based on whether or not the gaming state is being supported by ordinary power, and does not include the level of the probability state in the determination target.

If it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is not short (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is short (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. . That is, if the time is short, regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the start port 1 (start port distribution device 36) will not win unless it is left-handed, and the normal variation winning device 37 will not win if it is not right-handed. Therefore, the short-time state is a gaming state in which right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when the start port 1 is won during the short-time state (that is, when left-handed during the short-time state). Is configured to transmit a right-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 and to cause the effect control device 300 to issue a notification (warning) to instruct to make a right-hand strike.

  Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the start port 1 (start port distribution device 36) (step A107), a special-purpose start port switch common process (step A108) is performed.

  Next, a winning opening monitoring table is prepared for the starting port 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A109), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning at the starting port 2. (Step A111).

If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning at the start port 2 (step A111; N), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning at the start port 2 (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is in operation, that is, the normal variable winning. It is determined whether or not the device 37 is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (step A112). If it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y), step A114 is performed. The process proceeds to the following process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not a normal electric power fraud has occurred (step A113).

  In determining whether or not the ordinary power fraud is occurring, it is determined that the fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determination (for example, 5). The normal variation winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud has occurred. When there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. Then, when the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  If it is determined in step A113 that there is no fraudulent power transmission (step A113; N), a table for setting information on hold by the start port 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (step A114). A start port switch common process (step A115) is performed, and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. If it is determined in step A113 that the power transmission fraud has occurred (step A113; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, details of the hard random number acquisition processing (steps A102 and A110) in the above-described start port switch monitoring processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of hard random number acquisition processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the hard random number acquisition process, first, no winning information is set for the monitored start port among the start port 1 (start port distribution device 36) and the start port 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A121). Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the monitored start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switches 37a and 37d (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the monitoring target start port switch (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is an input to the monitored start switch (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A123). A124).

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the big hit random number extracted to the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A125). Then, among the start port 1 (start port distribution device 36) and the start port 2 (ordinary variation winning device 37), information on winning of the start port to be monitored is set (step A126), and hard random number acquisition processing is performed. finish.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, details of the special start port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the start port switch monitoring process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special chart start port switch common process according to the first embodiment.

The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switches 37a and 37d.
In the special figure start port switch common processing, first, information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switches 37a and 37d is sent to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. On the other hand, the start port signal output count which is the output count is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step A132), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A133). . If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the starter signal output number area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135 after passing through step A134. In the first embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the updated value becomes “0” when “+1” is updated, and it is determined that the output count overflows.

  Next, of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switches 37a and 37d, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure hold (start memory) to be updated corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value. (Step A135). When the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. If the number of special figure hold to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), update the number of special figure hold (number of special figure 1 hold or special figure 2 hold) to be updated by “+1” ( In step A136), the start port winning flag to be monitored is saved (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored and the number of special figure hold is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM ( Step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starter switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not a winning is made for the start port 1 (start port distribution device 36) (step A142).
If it is determined in step A142 that the winning is not for the start port 1 (step A142; N), the process proceeds to step A145.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A142 that the winning is to the starting port 1 (step A142; Y), a small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step A143), and the RWM small hit symbol random number is prepared. Save in the storage area (step A144).

  Next, the variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2, and the variation pattern random number 3 are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step A145), and the special figure hold information determination process (step A146) is performed.

  Next, a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the start opening switch to be monitored and the special figure hold number is prepared (step A147), a production command setting process (step A148) is performed, and a special figure start opening switch common process is performed. finish.

  Here, the RAM 111C of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the start winning area of the start opening distribution device 36 and the normal variation winning device 37, and changes the special figure. A start winning storage means is provided for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start memory serving as a right to execute the display game. The start winning storage means (RAM 111C) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game balls to the start opening 1 (start opening distribution device 36) as a first start storage up to a predetermined number. Then, various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A146) in the above-described start port switch common process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of special figure hold information determination processing according to the first embodiment.

  The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

  In the special figure hold information determination process, first, the starting port winning flag saved in step A137 is checked to determine whether or not the starting port 1 (starting port distribution device 36) has won a prize (step A151). ).

If it is determined at step A151 that the winning is not for the start port 1 (step A151; N), the process proceeds to step A154 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A151 that the start port 1 has been won (step A151; Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (step A152).

If it is determined in step A152 that the special figure time is short (step A152; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A152 that the special drawing time is not short (step A152; N), it is determined whether the big hit or the small hit is being made (step A153).

In step A153, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit is being made (step A153; Y), the special figure holding information determination processing is ended.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A153 that the jackpot or the jackpot is not being hit (step A153; N), it is determined whether the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not. A big hit determination process (step A154) is performed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot (step A155). If the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (step A156), and the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A140 is corresponded. Stop symbol information is acquired (step A157), the process proceeds to step A164, and the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), it is determined whether or not it is a winning to the start port 1 (start port distribution device 36) (step A158).
If it is determined in step A158 that the winning is not made at the starting port 1 (step A158; N), the stop symbol information of the outage is set (step A163), the process proceeds to step A164, and thereafter Perform the process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A158 that the start port 1 has been won (step A158; Y), whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not. A small hit determination process (step A159) is performed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step A160). If the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the stop symbol information of the outage is set (step A163), the process proceeds to step A164, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A143 is obtained. (Step A162), the process proceeds to step A164, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  Then, a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the target start opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and an effect command setting process (step A165) is performed. Next, a special figure information setting process (step A166) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern is performed, and a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A167) for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game. To do.

  Thereafter, a prefetch variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number representing the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A168), and an effect command setting process (step A169) is performed, and the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step A166 and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary process.

  Through the above processing, a prefetch symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched and a prefetch variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the result control (result of prefetching) of the result related information (whether it is a big hit or the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is effected before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variable display game. It is possible to notify.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning storage means (RAM 111C) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Judgment) Pre-determination means. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the start winning when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special winning opening switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment.

  In the big prize opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the big prize opening (special variable prize winning device 38) is being opened, that is, whether or not it is in a special gaming state (step A201). When the special winning opening is being opened (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to step A205 and the subsequent processes are performed. If it is not in the process of opening the big winning opening (step A201; N), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step A202).

  When the winning prize remaining ball processing is in progress (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If it is not in the big winning opening remaining ball processing (step A202; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit (in the small hit gaming state) is being processed (step A203).

  If the small hit process is being performed (step A203; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. When the small hitting is not being processed (step A203; N), it is determined whether the small hit remaining ball is being processed (step A204).

  When the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A204; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring processing is terminated. If the small hit remaining sphere processing is in progress (step A204; Y), the processing proceeds to step A205.

  Note that the special figure game process number does not shift until the special figure game process timer becomes “0”, so the progress state of the game is checked by checking the special figure game process number value. Can be checked. Therefore, the special figure game process number is checked to determine whether the big winning opening is being opened, the big winning opening remaining ball is being processed, the small hit is being processed, and the small hit remaining ball is being processed. I will do it.

  Then, “0” is set in the winning counter for counting the number of winning prizes to the winning prize opening added in the current winning prize opening switch monitoring process (step A205). Is determined (step A206).

  If there is no input to the big prize opening switch 1 (step A206; N), the process proceeds to step A210 and the subsequent processes are performed. When there is an input to the big prize opening switch 1 (step A206; Y), a big prize mouth count command is prepared (step A207), an effect command setting process (step A208) is performed, and the value of the prize counter is set to “ +1 "is updated (step A209).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special prize opening switch 2 (step A210). If there is no input to the special prize opening switch 2 (step A210; N), the process proceeds to step A214. The subsequent processing is performed. When there is an input to the big prize opening switch 2 (step A210; Y), a big prize mouth count command is prepared (step A211), an effect command setting process (step A212) is performed, and the value of the prize counter is set to “ +1 "is updated (step A213).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is “0” (step A214). If the value of the winning counter is “0” (step A214; Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed. finish. If the value of the winning counter is not “0” (step A214; N), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (step A215), and if the big winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (step A215). In step A215; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

  When the winning ball remaining ball processing is not being performed (step A215; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed (step A216), and if the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed (step A216; In Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

  If the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A216; N), the value of the winning counter ("1" or "2") is added to the winning prize count (step A217), and the winning prize count is calculated. It is determined whether or not the upper limit value (the number of game balls that can be won in one round (9)) or more is reached (step A218).

  If the number of the big winning mouth count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; N), the big winning mouth switch monitoring process is terminated. If the winning prize count is greater than or equal to the upper limit (step A218; Y), the winning prize count is kept at the upper limit (step A219), and the information in the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to zero (step A220). ), It is determined whether or not the small hitting process is being performed (step A221).

  If it is not under mid-hit processing (step A221; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. When the process is being processed during the small hit (step A221; Y), the value of the end of the small hit release operation is saved in the big winning opening control pointer area (step A222), and the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. This closes the grand prize opening and ends one round.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, details of the special figure routine process (step A8) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure normal processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure routine processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) is “0” (step A301). If it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is “0” (step A301; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) is “0” (step A306). Then, if it is determined that the special figure 1 holding number is “0” (step A306; Y), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo has been started (step A311), and the customer waiting demo has not been started. (Step A311; N) sets a customer waiting demo flag in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A312).

  Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step A313), an effect command setting process (step A314) is performed, a special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. . On the other hand, if the customer waiting demonstration has been started in step A311, (step A311; Y), special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated.

  In step A301, if the special figure 2 hold number is not "0" (step A301; N), a special figure 2 change start process (step A302) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is performed. A reservation number command is prepared (step A303), and an effect command setting process (step A304) is performed. Then, the special figure fluctuation mid-process transition setting process (step A305) of special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure ordinary process is terminated.

  In step A306, if the special figure 1 hold number is not "0" (step A306; N), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A307) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is performed. A reserve number command is prepared (step A308), and an effect command setting process (step A309) is performed. Then, the special-figure changing process transition setting process (step A310) of special figure 1 is performed, and the special figure usual process is terminated.

  In this way, by checking the special figure 2 hold number before the special figure 1 hold number check, if the special figure 2 hold number is not “0”, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A302). Will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. In other words, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is displayed as the variable display game based on the first start memory. Priority control means for executing with priority over the game.

[Special figure transition setting process 1]
Next, details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A315) in the special figure normal process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure normal process transition setting process 1, first, “0”, which is a process number related to the special figure normal process, is set as a process number (step A321), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step S321). A322).

  Then, the information of the variation symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A323), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A324), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 is finished. To do.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 variation start process (step A307) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 1 variation start process of the first embodiment.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. In the special figure 1 variation start process, first, a special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the variation symbol discrimination flag area (step A331), and the first special figure variation display game is executed. A jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A332) is performed for setting shift information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the figure variation display game is a jackpot.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) relating to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol for setting the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step A334) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A335). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A337) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (step A302) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of special figure 2 variation start processing according to the first embodiment.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. It is something to do as.

  In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, first, a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A341), and the second special figure fluctuation display game is executed. A jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) is performed for setting shift information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the figure variation display game is a jackpot.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol for setting the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table that is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A332) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the big hit flag 1 setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small hit flag area (step A351), and deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A352). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1), prepared (step A353), and information on the special figure big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is stored. “0” is cleared (step A354). Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A355) is performed to determine whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not, and whether the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot It is determined whether or not (step SA356).

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is a big hit (step A356; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A352 (step A357). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is not a big hit (step A356; N), whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not is a big hit. A small hit determination process (step A358) is performed to determine whether the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step SA359).

  If the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A358) is a small hit (step A359; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag area in which the loss information is saved in step A351. (Step A360), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A358) is not a small hit (step A359; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed while saving the deviation information in both the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. In this way, in the first embodiment, the result of the first special figure variation display game is any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out of game”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the big hit flag 2 setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1), prepared (step A372), and information on the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is stored. “0” is cleared (step A373). Note that for the number of reservations 1 is an area for storing information (random number or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A374) is performed to determine whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not, and whether the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot It is determined whether or not (step SA375).

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is a big hit (step A375; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A371 (step A376). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is not a big hit (step A375; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the first embodiment, the result of the second special figure variation display game is either “big hit” or “out of game”.

[Big hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the jackpot determination process (steps A154, A355, and A374) in the special figure hold information determination process, the jackpot flag 1 setting process, and the jackpot flag 2 setting process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of jackpot determination processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the big hit determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value is set (step A381), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

  When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), the difference is set as the determination result (step A387), and the big hit determination process ends. Specifically, when the jackpot determination process is a jackpot determination process (step A355) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, if the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), Since it is a small hit or miss, “other than big hit (small hit or miss)” is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, the case where the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y) is out of place. Therefore, “other than big hit (out of line)” is set as the determination result (step A387).

  If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; N), it is determined whether or not the probability is high (the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state) (step A383). .

  If the probability is high (step A383; Y), an upper limit determination value with high probability is set (step A384), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is greater than the upper limit determination value ( Step A386). If not in the high probability state (step A383; N), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set (step A385), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A385). A386).

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), the difference is set as the determination result (step A387), and the big hit determination process is terminated. Specifically, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A355) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, when the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), Since it is a hit or miss, “other than big hit (small hit or miss)” is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, the case where the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y) is out of place. Then, “other than big hit (out)” is set as the determination result (step A387).

  If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; N), that is, if the big hit is a big hit, the big hit is set as the determination result (step A388), and the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the small hit determination process (steps A159 and A358) in the special figure hold information determination process and the big hit flag 1 setting process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the small hit determination process according to the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in the small hit determination process, first, a small hit lower limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391). Note that the small hit determination is performed using the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit determination. In other words, “small hit” means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hit judgment lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment upper limit that is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit. Of course, the range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value are set so as not to suffer.

  When the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391; Y), that is, when it is out of place, a determination is made as a determination result (step A393), and the small hit determination processing is terminated.

  If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391; N), a small hit upper limit determination value is set, and whether or not the target big hit random value is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value is determined. Determine (step A392).

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A392; Y), that is, when it is out of place, the determination result is set as out (step A393), and the small hit determination process is terminated.

  If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A392; N), that is, if it is a small hit, the small hit is set as the determination result (step A394), and the small hit determination processing is terminated. To do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, it is first determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401). If the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (the number of holds) 1) is loaded with a jackpot symbol random number (step A402). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step A403), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A404). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  After that, the special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A405), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol 1 symbol display unit 53 and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A407), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time reduction determination is acquired. The data area is saved (step A408), and the production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A409). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state and the effect mode after the special gaming state is finished. In the case of the first embodiment, the effect mode shifts in response to a hit, and the transition destination of the effect mode that shifts after the hit ends changes according to the type of winning symbol (type of big hit symbol or small hit). Also, in the case of a special big hit symbol (for example, 4R probability variation symbol) in the special figure 1, the transition-destination effect mode is a certain probability variation confirmation depending on whether or not the gaming state is in certain probability variation. It is determined whether to shift to the production mode, which is difficult to distinguish whether it is the production mode or the probability variation. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is a small hit (step A410). The small hit design random number is loaded from the small hit design random number storage area (for holding number 1) (step A411). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step A412), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A413).

  Thereafter, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A414), and effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A415). Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

  If the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A410; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number region (step A416), and the loss stop symbol pattern is stored in the stop symbol pattern region. Save (step A417), and prepare a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A418). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A419), and an effect command setting process (step A420) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A421), and the information in the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to "0" (step A422). Then, the information of the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) is cleared to “0” (step A423), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, it is first determined whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431). If the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area ( The jackpot symbol random number is loaded from the reservation number 1 (step A432). Next, a special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step A433), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A434). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  Thereafter, the special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A435), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol 2 symbol display unit 54 and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A437), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time reduction determination is acquired. The data area is saved (step A438), and the presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state and the effect mode after the special gaming state is finished. Further, in the case of the first embodiment, the big hit in the special figure 2 is a special production mode in which the production mode of the transition destination becomes the certainty change determination regardless of the big hit symbol. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not big hit (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number region (step A440), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern region. (Step A441), a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (Step A442). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A443), and an effect command setting process (step A444) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A445), and the information in the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) is cleared to “0” (step A446). ), The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

  That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball at the start port 1 (start port distribution device 36), and the start port 2 (normal variation winning device 37). ) To display a variation display game executing means for executing the second variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball at (1). In addition, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control unit that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination unit (game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure information setting process (steps A166, A334, A344) in the special figure hold information determination process, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of special figure information setting processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the case of the first embodiment, the probability state (low / high probability, with / without time) does not affect the change distribution, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the change distribution. In the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes according to the probability state, the presence / absence of a short time state, the progress of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

  In the special figure information setting process, first, the first half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A452).

  Next, the first-half variable group selection offset table is set (step A453), and offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold count and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A454).

  Next, the first-half variation group selection pointer and offset data are added (step A455), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 1 area (step A456). As a result, in the variable distribution information 1 area, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of holds, and the effect mode is saved. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (fluctuation mode until the start of reach), and is used to select a fluctuation group later. However, depending on the specifications of the model, since the fluctuation time is shortened only when there is a large number when the number of holdings is large, the number of holdings does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation as a result. A variation group includes a plurality of variation patterns. When determining a variation pattern, the variation group is first selected, and then one variation pattern is selected from the variation group. ing.

  Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A457), and the latter half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A458).

  Next, the second half variation group selection offset table is set (step A459), and offset data corresponding to the target special figure holding number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A460).

  Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A461), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 2 area (step A462), and the special figure information setting process is terminated. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the stop symbol type, the number of holds, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (reach type (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, the reach rate changes according to the number of holds only in the case of a loss (the reach rate becomes low when the number of holds is large). Does not affect.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the above-described special figure hold information determination process, special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and fluctuation pattern setting process (steps A167, A336, A346) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the variation pattern setting process according to the first embodiment.

  Note that the fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation that is a fluctuation aspect from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

  In the variation pattern setting process, first, a variation group address table is set (step A471), the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step A472), and the target variation pattern is set. The fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A473). In the first embodiment, the structure of the latter-half variation group table is different depending on whether it is for winning or not. Specifically, the hit use has a 1-byte size and the out-use use has a 2-byte size. The hit occurrence rate is lower than the occurrence rate of loss, and even 1 byte is sufficient. Therefore, from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity, the use is 1 byte size. Therefore, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used for the hit. In addition, the occurrence rate of deviation is higher than the occurrence rate of hits, and in order to make more various effects appear, the size for removal is a 2-byte size.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is out of place (step A474). If it is out of place (step A474; Y), a 2-byte distribution process (step A475) is performed, The process proceeds to A477, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is not out of place (step A474; N), a distribution process (step A476) is performed, the process proceeds to step A477, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  Then, the address of the latter half fluctuation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step A477), and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of holdings 1), Prepare (Step A478). Then, a sorting process (step A479) is performed, the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step A480). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, the first half variation group table is set (step A481), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and the second half variation number (step A482). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of holdings 1). (Step A484). Thereafter, a sorting process (step A485) is performed, the first variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired, saved in the first variation number area (step A486), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern that is a game execution mode from among a plurality of variations.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the fluctuation start information setting process (steps A337 and A347) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the change start information setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the change start information setting process, first, information on random number storage areas of the target change pattern random number 1, change pattern random number 2, and change pattern random number 3 is cleared (step A491). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the latter half variation time value table is set (step A494), and the latter half variation time value corresponding to the latter half variation number is acquired (step A495).

  Then, the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value are added (step A496), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A497). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first variation number is prepared (step A498), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second variation number is prepared (step A499), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A500). ). Next, the special figure holding number corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is updated by “−1” (step A501), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is set (step A502). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A503), the information on the free area after the shift is cleared (step A504), and the variation start information setting process is terminated.

  Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random values stored in the start storage unit (RAM 111C). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information related to the pattern and a stop information command including information related to extension of the stop time are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 1)]
Next, the details of the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) (step A310) in the special-figure normal process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1), first, “1”, which is the process number related to the special figure changing process, is set as a process number (step A511), and the special figure game process number area is processed. The number is saved (step A512).

  Then, the information in the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A513), and a signal related to the fluctuation start in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A514). Note that the signal related to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal. Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A515), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area. (For example, 100 ms) is saved (set) (step A516), and the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) is terminated.

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 2)]
Next, the details of the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) (step A305) in the special-figure normal process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2), first, “1”, which is the process number related to the special figure changing process, is set as a process number (step A521), and the special figure game process number area is processed. The number is saved (step A522).

  Then, the information in the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A523), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation in the special figure 2 (the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A524). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A525), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. Is saved (set) (step A526), and the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) is terminated.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure changing process according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure changing process, first, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A601), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A602). In the case of the first embodiment, 600 ms is set as the display time when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol pattern, and 600 ms is set as the display time when the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern. When the pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time. In the case of the first embodiment, the same display time is set for the stop symbol pattern, the symbol pattern for big hit, the symbol pattern for big hit, and the symbol pattern for small hit, but different display times may be set.

  Subsequently, the special figure display process transition setting process (step A603) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Special map display process transition setting process]
Next, details of the special figure display mid-process transition setting process (step A603) in the special figure changing process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure display mid-process transition setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure display process transition setting process, first, “2”, which is the process number related to the special figure display process, is set as a process number (step A611), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area ( Step A612).

  Next, a signal related to the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A613), and a signal related to the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A614). The signal related to the end of the special symbol 1 variation is a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 variation signal. The signal related to the end of the special symbol 2 variation is a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 variation signal.

  Then, the control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the symbol fixed number signal control timer area related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game for output in the external information terminal (step A615). After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, a stop flag related to the variable stop in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag region ( Step A616), as information for controlling the special figure 2 variable display game in the special figure 2 symbol display section 54, a stop flag related to the variable stop in the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area. (Step A617), and the special figure display process transition setting process is terminated.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, details of the special figure display processing (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 45 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of special figure display processing according to the first embodiment. FIG. 46 is a second diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special chart display process according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure display process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the information on the small hit flag area of the RWM is cleared (step A701). Step A702).

  Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 set process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded. (Step A703), the information of the RWM big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step A704). Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A705). If the big hit flag 2 is determined to be a big hit (step A705; Y), the big hit (second figure 2) of the second special figure variation display game is determined. A signal related to the start of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708), and a round number upper limit value table is set (step A709). The signal related to the start of the special figure 2 big hit is a signal for turning on the condition device operating signal, a signal for turning on the accessory continuous action device operating signal, and a signal for turning on the special symbol 2 hit signal. Including.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A705; N) as a result of checking the big hit flag 2, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A706). (Step A706; Y), the test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A707), round A number upper limit table is set (step A709). The signal related to the start of the special figure 1 big hit is a signal for turning on the condition device operating signal, a signal for turning on the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, and a signal for turning on the special symbol per signal. Including.

  Next, after setting the round number upper limit table (step A709), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information (in the case of the first embodiment, “16” or “4”) is acquired, Save in the upper limit area of the round number of the RWM (step A710). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

  Next, a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the special decoration command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and an effect command setting process (step A713) is performed. Thereafter, a probability information command related to information for setting the probability of the winning result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game to be a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and an effect command setting process (step A717) is performed.

  Next, the prize winning opening release information and the signal corresponding to the probability state of the winning result in the usual figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A718, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state. Note that each on / off is determined by the information about the winning prize opening and the probability state. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned on when the jackpot is a jackpot with a lottery (the jackpot opening information is other than the jackpot opening information 1), and the jackpot without a lottery (a so-called sudden hit jackpot. When the information is the big prize opening information 1), it is turned on when it is a big hit in the short time state, and is turned off otherwise. The big hit 3 signal is turned on when a big hit with a ball is off and turned off when a big hit without a ball.

  After that, the winning prize opening information and the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms, or 300 ms) corresponding to the state of the probability of being a hit result in the normal map variable display game and the special map variable display game are set. (Step A719), the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special game processing timer area (Step A720). Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and the short time state of the special figure when the special result occurs is stored. Then, an effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, the information on the incorrect winning prize number area of the big winning opening (special variable winning apparatus 38) corresponding to the big winning opening information is cleared (step A722), and the big winning opening corresponding to the big winning opening information is cleared. The fraud monitoring non-period monitoring period flag is saved in the big prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A723). Thereafter, the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A724) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not big hit in step A706 (step A706; N), it is determined whether or not the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).

  If it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A725; Y), the high probability variation frequency update process (step A726), the production mode information check process related to the production mode setting (step A727). ) To determine whether or not the special figure has a high probability (the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state) (step A728).

  When it is determined in step A728 that the special figure high probability is not in effect (step A728; N), the special decoration command is loaded from the special decoration figure command area, prepared (step A729), and an effect command setting process (Step A730) is performed. Next, a small hitting fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, the process proceeds to step A733, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure has a high probability (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733, and the subsequent processes are performed. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but the occurrence of the small hit is generated. In order to prevent the player from being aware of this, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.

  Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A733). Thereafter, the small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 (step A734) is performed, and the special figure display mid-process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the high probability variation frequency update process (step A735), the production mode information check process related to the production mode setting (step A735). A736) is performed, the remaining switching preparation rotation speed corresponding to the effect mode number is set (step A737), and it is determined whether or not the remaining production rotation speed matches the remaining switching preparation rotation speed (step A738). Note that the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation is a different value (rotation speed: for example, mode A is 4 times, mode B is 3 times, mode C is 8 times, etc.) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes. It may be the same value (number of rotations) in any one of the plurality of effect modes, or the same value (number of rotations) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes. ).

  If it is determined in step A738 that the remaining rotation speed for production and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation do not match (step A738; N), special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed to display the special figure. End the middle process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A738 that the remaining production rotation speed matches the remaining switching preparation rotation speed (step A738; Y), a production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A739), and production command setting is performed. After performing the process (step A740), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading effect from being performed several rotations before the effect mode is switched. By transmitting the effect mode switching preparation command to the effect control device 300, the effect is switched across the modes. It is possible to prevent contradiction from occurring.

[High probability change count update processing]
Next, details of the high probability variation number update process (steps A726 and A735) in the special chart display process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of high probability variation frequency update processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the high probability variation frequency update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure high probability is in effect (step A751), and if the special figure high probability is not significant (step A751; N), the high probability variation frequency update processing is performed. Exit.

  When the special figure high probability is in progress (step A751; Y), the high probability fluctuation number for managing the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game to be in the high probability state is updated by “−1” (step A752). It is determined whether or not the probability variation number is “0” (step A753).

  If the high probability variation number is not “0” (step A753; N), the high probability variation number update process is terminated. When the number of high-probability fluctuations is “0” (step A753; Y), the information in the high-probability notification flag area is cleared (step A754), and a signal related to high-probability end is saved in the external information output data area ( Step A755). The signal relating to the high probability end is a signal for turning off the two jackpot signals.

  Then, a signal relating to the end of the high probability & short time (high probability & no time short or high probability & short time) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A756). The signals related to the end of the high probability & short time are the signals that turn off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the signals that turn off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and the special symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal. , A signal for turning off the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal, and a signal for turning off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal. In addition, even during the special figure high probability, only the probability state changes in the normal figure, so the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always off.

Then, the timeless number is saved in the game state display number area (step A757), and the ordinary low probability flag is saved in the ordinary game mode flag area (step A758).
Then, the special figure low probability & no short time flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A759), and a signal relating to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760). The signal related to the left hand instruction is a signal for turning off the firing position designation signal 1. Then, to turn off the right-handed display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A761), and the high-probability variation number updating process is terminated.

[Direction mode information check processing]
Next, details of the effect mode information check process (steps A727 and A736) in the special figure display process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of effect mode information check processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the production mode information check process, first, it is determined whether or not the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771; Y), The effect mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the production mode is not changed according to the number of executed special figure variation display games, and for example, the production mode that continues until the next big hit in the high probability state is selected. It is.

  If the next mode transition information is not a non-updated code (step A771; N), the effect remaining rotation number that is the number of executions of the special figure variation display game until the change of the effect mode is updated by “−1” (step A772). ), It is determined whether or not the remaining rotational speed of the effect is “0” (step A773). The process of step A772 serves as a counting means for counting the number of executions of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game.

  If the remaining effect rotation speed is not “0” (step A773; N), the effect mode information check process is terminated. When the remaining effect rotation speed is “0” (step A773; Y), that is, when changing the effect mode from the next special figure variation display game, an effect mode information address table is set (step A774), The address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is acquired (step A775).

  The effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A776), and the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect remaining speed area (step A777). The effect mode to be transferred (the effect mode of the transfer destination) can be known from the next mode change information already saved before step A776. The next mode transition information relating to the next rendering mode of the transitioning rendering mode is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A778). In addition, the process of step A776 performs effect mode execution control means for performing execution control of any effect mode (game mode) among a plurality of effect modes (game mode) corresponding to the counting result by the counting means (step A772). (Game mode execution control means).

  A probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number acquired in step A776 is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A780). When the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, that is, when the probability state does not change (step A780; Y), the rendering mode is transmitted without transmitting the command to the rendering control device 300. The information check process ends. When the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A780; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A781), and the production command is set. Processing (step A782) is performed.

  Then, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed acquired in step A777 is prepared (step A783), and an effect command setting process (step A784) is performed. Then, a high probability variation number command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared (step A785), an effect command setting process (step A786) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode. (Step A787).

  If the new effect mode is not a left-handed mode (step A787; N), the effect mode information check process is terminated. If the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step A787; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A788), an effect command setting process (step A789) is performed, and effect mode information check is performed. The process ends.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A724) in the special figure display process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the process for setting the transition to the fanfare / interval process according to the first embodiment.

  In the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1, first, “3”, which is a process number related to the fanfare / interval process, is set as a process number (step A791), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area. (Step A792).

  Next, a signal relating to the start of the big hit (special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step A793). The signals relating to the start of the big hit include, for example, a signal for turning on one big hit signal (output with a big hit + small hit) and a signal for turning on four signals (output with a big hit).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of high probability & short time is saved in the test signal output data area (step A794). Signals related to the end of high probability & short time are, for example, a signal that turns off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal that turns off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a signal that turns off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal. , A signal for turning off the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal, and a signal for turning off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal.

  Thereafter, information on the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step A795), and a number without time is saved in the game state display number area (step A796). Save the ordinary low probability flag in the area (step A797).

  Then, the information in the variation symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the information in the high probability notification flag area is cleared in order to turn off the gaming state display LED related to the high probability state display (step A799). A special figure low probability & no short time flag is saved in the figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the production control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801), and the special figure change that can be executed in a high probability state The information of the high probability variation frequency area for managing the number of times of the display game is cleared (step A802). As a result, the high-probability state and the short-time state are terminated, and the normal probability state and the normal state are obtained.

  Thereafter, the number of the effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A803), and the game control apparatus 100 manages the effect mode, so the information on the remaining effect rotation speed area is cleared (step A804). Then, the non-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A805). Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (launching position designation signal 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806), and the right-handed display LED is turned on so The number in the state is saved (step A807), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 ends. As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 (step A734) in the above-described special figure display mid-process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the process transition setting process 1 during small hitting fanfare according to the first embodiment.

  In the small hitting fanfare process transition setting process 1, first, “7”, which is a process number related to the small hitting fanfare process, is set as a process number (step A811), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area. (Step A812). Then, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 300 ms) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A813), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step A814). The signal relating to the start of the small hit is, for example, a signal that turns on one big hit signal (outputs with a big hit + small hit).

  Then, a signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step A815). The signal regarding the start of the small hit is, for example, a signal for turning on the special symbol one small hit signal.

  Then, the information on the illegal winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (step A816), and the illegal winning period illegal monitoring period flag area is saved in the illegal winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A817). Then, the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A818). The signal relating to the right-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning on the launch position designation signal 1.

  Then, in order to turn on the right-handed display LED, the right-handed state number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A819), and the small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 is completed.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process (step A11) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the fanfare / interval processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by “+1” (step A901), a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A902), and the effect command setting process (Step A903) is performed.

  After that, a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A904), an opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening information is acquired (step A905), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is acquired. It is determined whether or not the value is larger than the value (step A906).

  When the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A906; Y), the opening time of the large winning opening for short opening (in the case of the first embodiment, 0.2 s) is set in the special game processing timer area. After saving (step A907), a special winning opening opening process transition setting process (step A909) is performed to release the special winning opening, and the fanfare / interval processing is terminated.

  If the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching determination value (step A906; N), the opening time of the large winning opening for long opening (29s in the case of the first embodiment) is set as the special-purpose game processing timer area. (Step A908), a special winning opening opening process transition setting process (Step A909) is performed in order to open the special winning opening, and the fanfare / interval processing is terminated.

  Here, in the first embodiment, (1) 4R, special winning opening release information 1 (all short opening), (2) 16R, special winning opening release information 2 (all long opening), ( 3) 16R, special prize opening information 3 (1-4R is long open, 5-16R is short open), (4) 4R, special prize opening information 4 (all long open), (5) 16R, big prize Mouth open information 5 (all long open), (6) 16R, big prize opening information 6 (1-8R is long open, 9-16R is short open), (7) 16R, big prize opening information 7 (1 -4R is set to long open, and 5-16R is set to short open).

  Therefore, in the big prize opening operation determination table, the big prize opening information 1 data and the opening switching determination value “0”, the big winning opening information 2 data and the opening switching determination value “16” are the big winning opening. The opening information 3 data and the opening switching determination value “4” are the big winning opening opening information 4 data and the opening switching determination value “4”, and the big winning opening opening information 5 data and the opening switching determination value “16” are. The special winning opening opening information 6 data and the opening switching determination value “8” are stored in association with the large winning opening opening information 7 data and the opening switching determination value “4” in association with each other. Then, an opening operation is performed so that long opening is performed while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the opening switching determination value, and short opening is performed when the number of rounds exceeds the opening switching determination value.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the process for setting the transition to the large winning opening opening process (step A909) in the above-described fanfare / interval process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the process transition setting process during the special prize opening opening according to the first embodiment.

  In the process for setting a process for opening a special prize opening, first, “4”, which is a process number related to the process for opening a special prize opening, is set as a process number (step A911), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area. (Step A912). Thereafter, a signal relating to the opening of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A913). The signal related to the start of opening of the big prize opening is, for example, a signal for turning on the special electric accessory 1 operating signal.

  Next, the information on the number-of-award winning number count area for storing the number of winnings to the winning a prize opening is cleared (step A914). Then, the ON data of the special winning a prize opening (special variable prize-winning device 38) is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A915), and the special prize opening opening process transition setting process is terminated.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, the details of the special winning opening opening process (step A12) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the special winning opening opening process according to the first embodiment.

  In the process of opening the special winning opening, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit area to determine whether the current round is the final round. Is determined (step A1001).

  If it is the final round (step A1001; Y), the final remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1008), and an ending command is prepared (step A1009), the process proceeds to step A1010, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  If it is not the final round (step A1001; N), a big winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1002), an opening switching determination value corresponding to the big winning opening opening information is acquired (step A1003), and the number of rounds is It is determined whether or not the open switching determination value is exceeded (A1004).

  If the number of rounds exceeds the open switching determination value (step A1004; Y), the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4 s) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1005). Then, an interval command is prepared (step A1007), the process proceeds to step A1010, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  If the number of rounds does not exceed the open switching determination value (step A1004; N), the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 s) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1006). Then, an interval command is prepared (step A1007), the process proceeds to step A1010, and the subsequent processes are performed.

Thereafter, an effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, a special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1011) is performed, and the special winning opening open process is terminated.
[Large winning ball remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the big winning opening remaining ball processing shift setting process (step A1011) in the above-described big winning opening open process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the winning prize remaining ball processing transition setting process, first, “5”, which is the processing number related to the winning ball remaining ball processing, is set as the processing number (step A1021), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1022). Then, off data of the special winning a prize opening (special variable prize-winning device 38) is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1023), and the special winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process is terminated.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
Next, details of the big winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the extra winning opening remaining ball process according to the first embodiment.

  In the winning ball remaining ball processing, first, whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed and the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM. Is determined (step A1101).

  In the case of the final round (step A1101; Y), a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1111), and the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag, the special winning opening release information, and the stop symbol pattern ( For example, 1.9 s) is set (step A1112). Then, the ending time is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A1113), the big hit end process transition setting process (step A1114) is performed, and the big winning opening remaining ball process is ended.

  If it is not the final round (step A1101; N), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1102), and an open switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening information is acquired (step A1103). Then, a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 s) is set (step A1104), it is determined whether the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1105), and the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value. In the case (step A1105; Y), the process proceeds to step A1109 and the subsequent processes are performed.

  When the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening information is a rank-down effect type value (step A1106), and the big winning opening information is If it is not a rank-down effect system value (step A1106; N), the process proceeds to step A1109 and the subsequent processes are performed.

  When the big prize opening information is a rank-down effect type value (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of rounds is a special effect round value (for example, 2R, 4R, 8R) ( If the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107) (step A1107; N), the process proceeds to step A1109 and the subsequent processes are performed.

  When the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (step A1107; Y), an interval time for rank-down effect (for example, 3.6 s) is set (step A1108), and the process proceeds to step A1109. The subsequent processing is performed.

  Then, the interval time is saved in the special game process timer area (step A1109), the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step A1110) is performed, and the big winning opening remaining ball process is terminated.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step A1110) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 according to the first embodiment.

  In the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2, first, “3”, which is the process number related to the fanfare / interval process, is set as a process number (step A1121), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area. (Step A1122). Then, a signal relating to the end of opening of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1123). The signal related to the end of the special winning opening is a signal for turning off the special electric accessory 1 operating signal, for example.

Then, the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 ends.
[Big jackpot end process transition setting process]
Next, details of the jackpot end process transition setting process (step A1114) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the jackpot end process transition setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the jackpot end process transition setting process, first, “6”, which is a process number related to the jackpot end process, is set as a process number (step A1131), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1132).

  Then, a signal relating to the end of opening of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1133). The signal related to the end of the special winning opening is a signal for turning off the special electric accessory 1 operating signal, for example.

  Next, the information on the number-of-winner count area for storing the number of wins to the prize-winning mouth is cleared (step A1134), and the information on the number-of-rounds area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A1135). . Then, the information of the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit value of the round number in the special gaming state is cleared (step A1136), and the information of the round number upper limit information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the round number is stored. Clear (step A1137). Then, the information of the big winning opening release information area storing the big winning opening release information determination flag is cleared (step A1138), and the big hit end transition setting process is ended.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, details of the jackpot end process (step A14) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the big hit end process according to the first embodiment.

  In this jackpot end process, first, it is determined whether or not the time reduction determination data is time-saving operation data (step A1201). If it is not the short time operation data (step A1201; N), the big hit end setting process 1 (step A1202) is performed, and if it is the short time operation data (step A1201; Y), the big hit end setting process 2 (step A1203) is performed. .

  Then, the production mode information address table is set (step A1204), and the address of the table corresponding to the production mode transition information set at the start of variation (when the stop symbol is set) is acquired (step A1205).

  Next, as processing for saving the information necessary for managing the production mode in the game control device 100, first, the production mode number of the production mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the production mode number area. (Step A1206). Further, the effect remaining speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired, saved in the effect remaining speed region (step A1207), and the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. Transition information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1208).

  Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1209), the command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1210), and an effect command setting process (step A1211) is performed.

  As the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands that include information on the production mode in either “high probability / with time reduction” or “high probability / without time reduction”. In the case of the first embodiment, since the probabilistic state (so-called ST state) is always obtained when the big hit ends, the probability information commands include “high probability / short time / direction mode A”, “high probability / short time / direction” “Mode B”, “High probability / short time / direction mode C”, “High probability / no time / direction mode A” are not used in this process. ”,“ Low probability / no time reduction / production mode B ”, and“ low probability / no time reduction / production mode C ”.

Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the remaining effect rotation speed is prepared (step A1212), and an effect command setting process (step A1213) is performed.
Next, a high probability variation number command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared (step A1214), an effect command setting process (step A1215) is performed, and it is determined whether or not a short-time state occurs after the end of the big hit (step A1214). A1216).

If a short-time state occurs after the big hit (step A1216; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step A1219) is performed, and the big hit end process ends.
Further, when the time-short state does not occur after the big hit (Step A1216; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (Step A1217), and after performing the effect command setting process (Step A1218), the special figure normal process shifts. Setting process 2 (step A1219) is performed, and the jackpot end process is terminated.

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
Next, details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A1202) in the jackpot end process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 1 according to the first embodiment.

  In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the absence of a time-short state is saved in the external information output data area (step A1221). The signal related to the absence of the short-time state is, for example, a signal for turning off two jackpot signals.

  Next, a signal related to the start of the high probability state and the absence of the short time state is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222). The signals relating to the start of the high probability state and the absence of the short time state are, for example, a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal for turning on the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a special symbol 1 variation time. It includes a signal for turning off the shortened state signal, a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 variation time shortened state signal, and a signal for turning off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal.

  Next, a number without a short time state is saved in the game state display number area (step A1223), a common low probability flag is saved in the normal game mode flag area (step A1224), and the special game mode flag area is saved. The special figure high probability & no short time flag is saved (step A1225). Thereafter, an initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability variation count area (step A1226), and a signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1227). The signal relating to the left-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the launch position designation signal 1.

Next, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A1228), and the big hit end setting process 1 is finished.
[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A1203) in the above jackpot end process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 2 according to the first embodiment.

  In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of the time-saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231). The signal relating to the start of the short-time state is, for example, a signal for turning on two jackpot signals. Since the signal related to the start of the short-time state is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous manner.

  Next, a signal related to the start of the high probability state and the short time state is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232). The signals relating to the start of the high probability state and the short time state are, for example, a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal for turning on the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a special symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal. , A signal for turning on the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal, and a signal for turning on the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal.

  Next, the number with the short time state is saved in the game state display number area (step A1233), the common figure high probability flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A1234), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. The special figure high probability & short time flag is saved (step A1235). Thereafter, an initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability variation frequency area (step A1236), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. In the case of the first embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the time-shortening state, but the right-handed mode is set from the middle-hit, so the setting for the right-handed end setting process 2 is not performed.

[Special figure transition setting process 2]
Next, details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step A1219) in the above jackpot end process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, “0”, which is the process number related to the special figure normal process, is set as the process number (step A1241), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step S1241). A1242).

  Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step A1243). The signals relating to the end of the jackpot include, for example, a signal for turning off the jackpot 1 signal, a signal for turning off the jackpot 3 signal, and a signal for turning off the jackpot 4 signal.

  Next, a signal relating to the end of jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1244). The signal regarding the end of the jackpot is a signal for turning off the condition device operating signal, a signal for turning off the continuous action device operating signal, a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 signal, and a special symbol 2 signal. Includes a signal that turns off the signal.

  Subsequently, the information in the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1245), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A1246), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A1247). Then, the information of the special figure game mode flag saving area is cleared (step A1248), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1249), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 is performed. Exit.

[Small fanfare during processing]
Next, details of the small hitting fanfare process (step A15) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of small hitting fanfare processing according to the first embodiment.

In the small hitting fanfare process, the small hitting medium process transition setting process (step A1301) is performed, and the small hitting fanfare process is terminated.
[Small hit middle processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the small hitting process transition setting process (step A1301) in the small hitting fanfare medium process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the small hitting process transition setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the small hit / medium process transition setting process, first, “8”, which is the process number related to the small hit / medium process, is set as the process number (step A1311), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1312). ).

  Then, a small hit release time (for example, 0.2 s) is set in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1313), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1314). The signal relating to the start of the small hitting operation is, for example, a signal for turning on the special electric accessory 1 operating signal.

  Then, on data of the special winning a prize opening (special variable prize-winning device 38) is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1315), and information of the special winning prize count number area for storing the number of winning prizes to the special winning opening is stored. Clear (step A1316).

Then, the small hitting operation initial value (for example, “0”) is saved in the small hitting / measuring control pointer area (step A1317), and the small hitting / medium processing transition setting process is terminated.
[Processing during small hits]
Next, details of the middle hit process (step A16) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the small hitting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the small hit / medium process, first, the small hit / medium control pointer is loaded from the small hit / medium control pointer area (step A1401), and the value of the loaded small hit / medium control pointer is the small hit operation end value (for example, “6”). It is determined whether or not this is the case (step A1402).

  If the value of the loaded small hitting control pointer is not equal to or larger than the small hitting operation end value (step A1402; N), the value of the small hitting control pointer in the small hitting control pointer area is updated by “+1” (step A1403). ), A small hitting action transition setting process (step A1404) is performed, and the small hitting medium process is terminated. When the value of the loaded small hitting control pointer is equal to or larger than the small hit action end value (step A1402; Y), the flag is loaded from the special-purpose game mode flag save area (step A1405). It is determined whether or not the figure is in a high probability (step A1406). Note that the determination in step A1406 is based on the probability state and not the short-time state.

  When the loaded flag is in the special figure high probability (step A1406; Y), the process proceeds to step A1409 and the subsequent processes are performed. If the loaded flag is not in the special figure high probability (step A1406; N), a command for the small hit end screen is prepared (step A1407), and an effect command setting process (step A1408) is performed. Then, the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step 1409) is performed, and the small hit middle processing is terminated.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, details of the small hit motion transition setting process (step A1404) in the above-described small hit middle process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the small hitting operation transition setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the small hit operation transition setting process, first, the value of the small hit medium control pointer loaded in step A1401 is determined (step A1411). When the value of the small hit / medium control pointer loaded in step A1401 is “0”, “2”, or “4” (step A1411; pointer = 0, 2, 4), the value of the small hit / medium control pointer is set. The corresponding wait time (1500 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1412). Then, the off data of the big prize opening (special variable prize-winning device 38) is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step A1413), and the small hitting action transition setting process is ended.

  When the value of the small hitting control pointer loaded in step A1401 is “1”, “3”, or “5” (step A1411; pointer = 1, 3, 5), the value of the small hitting control pointer is set to the value. The corresponding special winning opening time (200 ms) is saved in the special game process timer area (step A1414). Then, the ON data of the special winning a prize opening (special variable prize-winning device 38) is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1415), and the small hitting action transition setting process is terminated.

  Here, the small hitting operation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating a timing chart of the small hit operation according to the first embodiment. In the figure, the numbers in the squares indicate the values of the control pointers.

  The small hitting operation includes a small hitting fanfare time (300 ms), a subsequent large winning opening opening time (200 ms), a subsequent waiting time (1500 ms), a subsequent large winning opening opening time (200 ms), and a subsequent weight. A time (1500 ms), a subsequent winning opening opening time (200 ms), a subsequent wait time (1500 ms), a subsequent winning opening opening time (200 ms), a remaining ball processing time (1900 ms), It is a series of operations for a total of 7600 ms, which consists of a small hitting ending time (100 ms).

  In the case of the small hitting operation, the control pointer value becomes “0” after the first big winning opening opening time elapses, and the control pointer value goes through the respective processes corresponding to “0” to “5”. The value of the control pointer is “6”. In this way, in the case of the small hitting operation, the small hitting remaining ball processing is performed after the four opening operations of the special variable winning device 38. In the small hitting operation, the small hitting ending time is set after the remaining ball processing time, so that an apparent ending time is obtained by adding the remaining ball processing time 1900 ms to the control small hitting ending time 100 ms.

  Note that during the small hitting fanfare time, the wait time, the remaining ball processing time, and the small hitting ending time, the special variable winning device 38 is closed by the off control of the big winning port solenoid 38b. Further, during the special winning opening opening time, the special variable winning apparatus 38 is opened by the on-control of the special winning opening solenoid 38b.

[Small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the small hit remaining sphere process shift setting process (step A1409) in the above-described small hit middle process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the small hit remaining sphere process transition setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the small hit remaining ball process transition setting process, first, “9”, which is the process number related to the small hit remaining ball process, is set as the process number (step A1421), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area ( Step A1422).

  Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1423), and the large winning opening (special variable winning apparatus 38) is turned off in the large winning opening solenoid output data area. The data is saved (step A1424), and the small hit remaining ball process transition setting process is terminated.

[Small ball remaining treatment]
Next, details of the small hit remaining ball process (step A17) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the small hit remaining sphere process according to the first embodiment.

In the small hit remaining ball process, the small hit end process shift setting process (step A1501) is performed, and the small hit remaining ball process is terminated.
[Small hit end process transition setting process]
Next, details of the small hit end process transition setting process (step A1501) in the small hit remaining ball process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the small hit end process transition setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the small hit end process transition setting process, first, “10”, which is the process number related to the small hit end process, is set as the process number (step A1511), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1512). ).

  Then, the small hitting ending time (for example, 0.1 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1513), and a signal relating to the end of the small hitting operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1514). The signal relating to the end of the small hitting operation is, for example, a signal for turning off the special electric accessory 1 operating signal.

  Then, the information of the big winning mouth count number area for storing the number of winning prizes to the big winning mouth is cleared (step A1515), the information of the small hitting control pointer area is cleared to zero (step A1516), and the small hit end transition setting process is performed. Exit.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, details of the small hit end process (step A18) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the small hit end process according to the first embodiment.

  In the small hit end process, first, a flag relating to the probability state is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1601), and it is determined whether or not the flag loaded in step A1601 is in the special figure high probability (step A1601). A1602). If the flag loaded in step A1601 has a special figure high probability (step A1602; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619 and the subsequent processes are performed.

  When the flag loaded in step A1601 is not in the special figure high probability (step A1602; N), an effect mode information address table is set (step A1603), and the effect set at the start of variation (when the stop symbol is set). The address of the table corresponding to the mode transition information is acquired (step A1604).

  Then, the effect mode number is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A1605), the effect remaining rotation speed is acquired and saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A1606), and the next mode transition information is acquired. Save in the next mode transition information area (step A1607).

  Then, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number acquired in step A1606 is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609). .

  If the prepared probability information command matches the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619 and the subsequent processes are performed. If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; N), the probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1610), and an effect command setting process (step A1611) is performed.

  Then, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed acquired in step A1606 is prepared (step A1612), and an effect command setting process (step A1613) is performed. Also, a high probability variation number command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared (step A1614), an effect command setting process (step A1615) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode. (Step A1616).

  If the new effect mode is not a left-handed mode (step A1616; N), the process proceeds to step A1619. If the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step A1616; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A1617), and an effect command setting process (step A1618) is performed.

  Then, a flag relating to the time reduction state is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1619), and it is determined whether or not the flag loaded in step A1619 is in the special figure time reduction (step A1620). When the flag loaded in step A1619 is in the special figure time reduction (step A1620; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1623) is performed, and the small hit end process is terminated.

  If the flag loaded in step A1619 is not in the special drawing time reduction (step A1620; N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1621). The signal relating to the left-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the launch position designation signal 1.

  In order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A1622), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1623) is performed. The hit end process ends.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 3]
Next, details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1623) in the above-described small hit end process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure normal process transition setting process 3, first, “0”, which is a process number related to the special figure normal process, is set as a process number (step A1631), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1631). A1632).

  Then, a signal related to the end of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step A1633), and a signal related to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1634). The signal relating to the end of the small hit is, for example, a signal for turning off one big hit signal. The signal related to the end of the small hit is, for example, a signal for turning off the special symbol small hit signal.

  Then, the information in the variation symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A1635), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1636). Then, the information of the special figure game mode flag saving area is cleared (step A1637), the illegality monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1638), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is executed. finish.

[Direction command setting processing]
Next, details of the effect command setting process in the above-described special figure game process subroutine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the effect command setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the production command setting process, first, the status of the production serial transmission buffer is read (step A1701), and it is determined whether or not the production serial transmission buffer is full (step A1702). If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1702; Y), the process returns to step A1701. If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A1702; N), command data (MODE) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A1703).

  Thereby, the effect command (MODE) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100. In the case of this flowchart, the command is transmitted in a 2-byte configuration such as “MODE” and “ACTION”, as in the case of a production command. In those cases, a flowchart corresponding to a plurality of bytes may be used.

The status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A1704), and it is determined whether or not the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1705).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1705; Y), the process returns to step A1704. If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A1705; N), command data (ACTION) is written into the effect serial transmission buffer (step A1706), and the effect command setting process is terminated.

  By writing the command data (ACTION) into the effect serial transmission buffer, the effect command (ACTION) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100. Will be.

  In this way, the effect command (MODE) and the effect command (ACTION) are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication. The production control device 300 receives these commands and performs production control on the screen of the display device 41 or the like. Since the serial communication is performed using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control apparatus 100, there is an advantage that the configuration is simple.

[Design variation control processing]
Next, details of the symbol variation control process (step A22) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the symbol variation control process according to the first embodiment.

  In the symbol variation control process, first, the target variation control flag is set and it is checked whether the symbol is varying (step A1801), and it is determined whether the symbol is varying as a result of the check (step A1802). .

  If the symbol is changing (step A1802; Y), a symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the target symbol is acquired (step A1803). Then, the flashing control timer for measuring the variation time of the target symbol is updated by “−1” (step A1804), and it is determined whether or not the flashing control timer is “0” (step A1805).

When the blinking control timer is “0” (step A1805; Y), the blinking control timer initial value is saved in the blinking control timer area of the target symbol (step A1806).
Then, the variable symbol number of the target symbol is updated by “+1” (step A1807), and the process proceeds to step A1808. If the blinking control timer is not “0” (step A1805; N), the process proceeds to step A1808.

  Then, display data corresponding to the value of the variation symbol number area of the target symbol is acquired (step A1808), the acquired display data is saved in the segment region of the target symbol (step A1811), and the symbol variation control process is terminated. To do.

  In step A1802, if not changing (step A1802; N), a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the target symbol is acquired (step A1809). Then, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area of the target symbol is acquired (step A1810), the acquired display data is saved in the segment area of the target symbol (step A1811), and the symbol variation control process is terminated. To do.

  In addition, on the variation control table prepared in the special figure game process, information on the lower address of the variation control area, the address of the display table 2 (for stoppage), and the address of the display table 1 (for variation) is defined. Yes.

[Distribution processing]
Next, details of the sorting process (steps A476, A479, A485) in the above-described variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the distribution process according to the first embodiment.

  The sorting process selects the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1, or from the latter half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2. Processing for selecting the second half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game, or selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 3. It is.

  In the distribution process, first, the first data of the prepared latter-half variation group table (selection table), latter-half variation selection table (selection table), and first-half variation selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (that is, “0”). ) (Step A1901), and as a result of the check, it is determined whether or not the top data is a code without distribution (step A1902). Here, the second-half variation group table, the second-half variation selection table, and the first-half variation selection table store predetermined distribution values in association with at least one second-half variation pattern group, second-half variation pattern, and first-half variation pattern. In the case of a selection table that does not need to be assigned, a sorting value “0”, that is, a code without sorting is defined at the top.

  If the first data in the latter-half variation group table, the latter-half variation selection table, or the first-half variation selection table is an unsorted code (step A1902; Y), update to the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result ( Step A1907), the distribution process is terminated. On the other hand, if the first data of the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table is not an unsorted code (step A1902; N), the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table is displayed. One sort value specified first is acquired (step A1903).

  Subsequently, the distribution value obtained in step A1903 from the random number values (variation pattern random number 1, variation pattern random number 2, and variation pattern random number 3) loaded in steps A473, A478, and A484 of the variation pattern setting process. After calculating a new random value by subtraction (step A1904), it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A1905). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step A1905; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A1906), the process returns to step A1903.

  That is, after obtaining the distribution values specified in the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table, and the first half variation selection table in step A1903, the random value determined in step A1905 is used as a new random value. And a new random value is calculated (step A1904). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A1905). The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A1905 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A1905; Y). As a result, at least one latter-half variation selection table, latter-half variation pattern, or first-half variation pattern specified in the latter-half variation group table, the latter-half variation selection table, or the first-half variation selection table is selected. Select the variation number or the first half variation number. If it is determined in step A1905 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A1905; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step A1907), and the distribution process ends. To do.

[2-byte sort processing]
Next, details of the 2-byte distribution process (step A475) in the above-described variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of 2-byte distribution processing according to the first embodiment.

  The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1. As shown in FIG. 75, in the 2-byte sorting process, first, is the first data of the latter half fluctuation group table (selection table) prepared in the fluctuation pattern setting process a code with no sorting (ie, “0”)? (Step A2001), and as a result of the check, it is determined whether or not the top data is a code without distribution (step A2002). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variation group table (for example, a part of the variation group table when the result is out of order), since there is no need for distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top. .

  If the first data in the latter half variation group table is a code without distribution (step A2002; Y), the data address corresponding to the result of distribution is updated (step A2007), and the 2-byte distribution process is terminated. To do. On the other hand, when the first data in the latter-half variation group table is not a code without distribution (step A2002; N), one distribution value first defined in the latter-half variation group table is acquired (step A2003).

  Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2003 from the random value loaded in step A473 of the variation pattern setting process (value of variation pattern random number 1) (step A2004). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2005). When the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step A2005; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2006), the process returns to step A2003. That is, in step A2003, after the distribution value specified next in the variation group selection table is acquired, a new random value is calculated (step A2004). At this time, if there is a random number value determined in step A2005, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the determined random value. Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2005).

  The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A2005 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2005; Y). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation selection tables is selected from at least one latter-half variation selection table defined in the latter-half variation group table. If it is determined in step A2005 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2005; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step A2007), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. Exit.

[Normal game processing]
Next, the details of the usual game process (step S130) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 76 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the usual game processing according to the first embodiment. In the usual game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process related to the usual figure change display game is controlled, the display of the usual figure is set, and the like.

  In this ordinary game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and a general power prize switch monitoring process (step B2) for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a. To do. Next, if the usual game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the usual game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game process timer has become “0” (step B4).

  When the value of the usual game process timer is “0” (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has expired or has already expired, the process is branched to the process corresponding to the ordinary game process number. A process (step B5) for setting the referenced ordinary game sequence branch table in the register is performed (step B5), and a process (step B6) for acquiring a branch destination address of the process corresponding to the ordinary game process number is performed using the table. . Then, a subroutine call (step B7) is performed with the game process number.

  In step B7, when the game process number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the normal fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the normal fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, and the normal fluctuation process are performed. For this purpose, the usual processing (step B8) for setting information necessary for the purpose is performed. If the game process number is “1” in step B7, a process for changing the normal map (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing the process for displaying the normal map is performed.

  In step B7, if the game process number is “2”, if the result of the general-purpose variable display game is a win, the setting of the open time of the electric power depending on whether the time is short or the A general diagram display process (step B10) is performed for setting information necessary for performing the process during the drawing. In step B7, if the game process number is “3”, the process during the normal map (steps for setting the information necessary to continue the process during the normal map or to perform the baseball remaining ball process) B11) is performed.

  If the game process number is “4” in step B7, the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step B12) is performed for setting information necessary for performing the process for ending the normal map. If the game process number is "5" at step B7, a per-figure end process (step B13) is performed for setting information necessary for performing the normal chart process (step B8).

  After that, a general variation control table for controlling the variation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display is prepared (step B14), and the symbol variation control process related to the control of the variation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (step B15). To complete the ordinary game process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the usual game process timer is not 0 (step B4; N), that is, the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart of the gate switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment. In this gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). If there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether or not the game state is a right-handed game (step B102). Here, the right-handed gaming state is during a big hit, during a small hit, or during a special time (short during normal power support). In the case of a game state in which the player strikes right (Step B102; Y), the process proceeds to Step B105. If the game state is not right-handed (step B102; N), a left-handed instruction command is prepared (step B103), an effect command setting process (step B104) is performed, and the number of ordinary drawings held is obtained. Is less than the upper limit (eg, “4”) (step B105).

  When the number of reserved symbols is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the number of reserved symbols is updated by “+1” (step B106), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved symbols is updated. Calculate (step B107). The winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (step B108), the winning symbol random number is extracted and saved in the winning symbol random number storage area (step B109), and the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

  Further, when it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or when it is determined in step B105 that the number of pending drawings is not less than the upper limit value (step B105; N). The gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Penden winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the general power winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-described general game process will be described. FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the general power winning switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment. In this general power winning switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal figure is being hit, that is, whether or not the normal figure changing display game is in a hit state and the normal variable winning device 37 is executing a predetermined number of releasing operations. Is determined (step B111). If it is normal (step B111; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B112), and if there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B112; Y). If determined, the count number of the utility counter is updated by “+1” (step B113).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated utility counter has reached an upper limit value (for example, “6”) (step B114), and the count number has reached the upper limit value (step B114; Y). When the determination is made, based on the fact that the count of the ordinary power counter has reached the upper limit, as a process for closing the ordinary power, the value of the operation end (for example, “4”) is saved in the control pointer area during the normal figure ( Step B115), the ordinary game processing timer is cleared to zero (Step B116), and the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated. In other words, if there is a pay-per-use prize exceeding the upper limit value during the normal hit state, the hit end value is saved in the middle control processing pointer area at that time, and the normal hit state is not complete. Let it finish.

  Further, when it is determined in step B111 that the normal map is not being reached (step B111; N), if it is determined in step B112 that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B112; N), or step B114. When it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit value (step B114; N), the ordinary power winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the usual figure routine process (step B8) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process will be described. FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a normal routine process according to the first embodiment. In this ordinary processing, it is first determined whether or not the number of reserved drawings is “0” (step B121). If the number of reserved drawings is “0” (step B121; Y), The normal process transition setting process 1 (step B141) is performed, and the normal process is terminated. Further, when the usual figure holding number is not “0” (step B121; N), a random number is loaded from the winning random number storage area (for holding number 1) and the winning symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (step B122). The winning random number storage area (for holding number 1) and the winning symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) are cleared to zero (step B123).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the probability of a hit result in the usual fluctuation display game is higher than usual, that is, the time is short (step B124). When the normal probability is not high (step B124; N), a low probability lower limit determination value is set (step B125). When the normal probability is high (step B124; Y), the high probability lower limit determination value is set. Set (step B126). The low probability upper limit determination value and the high probability upper limit determination value are a common value (for example, “251”). Further, the low probability lower limit determination value and the high probability lower limit determination value are different values (for example, the low probability lower limit determination value is “251” and the high probability lower limit determination value is “1”). In comparison, the high probability lower limit determination value is a small value. As a result, the hit probability increases at a high probability as compared with a low probability, and is, for example, 0/251 when the probability is low and 250/251 when the probability is high.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B127). If the hit random number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B127; N), whether or not the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value. Is determined (step B128). In step B127, when the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (step B127; Y), or in steps B127 and B128, the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step B127; N, step B128; Y), that is, In the case of a miss, the slip information is saved in the hit flag area (step B129), the slip stop symbol number is set (step B130), and the slip symbol information is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B131). In steps B127 and B128, if the winning random number is less than the upper limit determination value and greater than or equal to the lower limit determination value, that is, if it is a hit (step B127; N, step B128; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area ( In step B132), a hit stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded hit symbol random number is set (step B133), and stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B134). In the first embodiment, there are three types of winning symbols.

  Next, the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B135), and the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B136). After that, the random number storage area per usual figure is shifted (step B137), the free area after the shift is cleared to zero (step B138), and the usual figure holding number is updated by "-1" (step B139). That is, in accordance with the execution of the usual map change display game related to the oldest number of held maps 1, the rankings of the number of held maps “2” to “4” are suspended after the number of held maps “1”. The process of moving up one by one is performed. As a result of this processing, the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area from 2 to 4 is shifted from the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area to 1 for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area. Will be. Then, the value for the number of reserved customary numbers 4 in the random number storage area per common number is cleared, and the number of reserved general figure numbers is decremented by “1”.

Then, a normal process transition setting process (step B140) is performed, and the normal chart normal process is terminated.
[Usual map transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B141) in the above normal figure normal process will be described. FIG. 80 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the normal routine process transition setting process 1 according to the first embodiment. In this normal figure normal process transition setting process 1, first, “0” is set as the process number for shifting to the normal figure normal process (step B151), and the process number is saved in the normal figure game process number area (step B151). B152). Thereafter, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B153), and the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Process transition setting process during normal map change]
Next, the details of the process transition setting process (step B140) during the normal map change in the above normal map normal process will be described. FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the process for setting the transition to the normal change process according to the first embodiment. In the process for changing the process for changing the normal map, first, “1” is set as the process number for shifting to the process for changing the normal figure (step B161), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area ( In step B162), the normal time change time (common to low probability and high probability (for example, 500 ms)) is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B163). After that, a signal related to the start of the normal variable display game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B164). It should be noted that the signal related to the start of the normal symbol variation display game is a signal for turning on the normal symbol 1 variation signal.

  Next, a changing flag indicating that the normal fluctuation display game is changing is saved in the normal fluctuation control flag area (step B165). Then, the flashing control timer initial value (for example, 100 ms), which is the initial value of the flashing cycle timer of the general display indicator, is saved in the general flashing control timer area (step B166), and the transition processing setting process for the normal map change process is performed. finish.

[Processing during normal map changes]
Next, the process during normal map change (step B9) in the above general game process will be described. FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of processing during normal map change according to the first embodiment. In this normal map change process, the normal map display process transition setting process (step B171) is performed, and the normal map change process is terminated.

[Transition setting process during normal map display]
Next, the details of the process for setting the transition to the normal map display process (step B171) in the process for changing the normal map will be described. FIG. 83 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a process for setting a transition to a normal map display process according to the first embodiment. In this normal chart display process transition setting process, first, the process number is set to "2" as a setting process for transitioning to the general chart display process (step B181), and the process number is set in the general game process number area. Save (step B182). Thereafter, the usual game display time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the usual game process timer area (step B183). Further, a signal related to the end of fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step B184). Note that the signal related to the end of the normal variation is a signal for turning off the normal symbol 1 variation signal.

Next, a stop flag indicating that the normal map change display game is stopped is saved in the normal map change control flag area (step B185), and the normal display display process transition setting process is terminated.
[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the normal map display process (step B10) in the above-described normal game process will be described. FIG. 84 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a normal map display process according to the first embodiment. In the process of displaying a normal map, first, the hit flag (hit information or disappointment information) set in the normal map normal process is loaded (step B191), and the RWM hit flag area information is cleared (step B192). ), It is determined whether or not the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B193).

  If the hit flag is not hit information (step B193; N), the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B198) for shifting to the normal figure normal process is performed, and the normal figure display process is terminated. This normal / normal process transition setting process 1 is the process shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the hit flag is hit information (step B193; Y), a hit process setting table is set (step B194).

  Then, a hit start pointer value (one of control pointers “0”, “2”, “4”) corresponding to the normal stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the normal pointer control pointer area (step B195), The general electric circuit opening time (500 ms or 1700 ms) corresponding to the general map stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the general graphic game processing timer area (step B196). As a result, the opening mode of the normal variation winning device 37 in the short-time state is set, and for example, it is possible to open four times. After that, a normal process transition setting process (step B197) is performed, and the normal chart display process is terminated.

[Normal processing transition setting process per ordinary figure]
Next, the details of the process for setting the transition to the normal map process (step B197) in the process for displaying the normal map will be described. FIG. 85 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the normal process transition setting process according to the first embodiment. In this normal process transition setting process, first, “3” is set as the process number for shifting to the normal process (step B201), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area. (Step B202). After that, a signal related to the start of the win-winning game (signal related to the win-winning game) and a signal related to the start of normal operation are saved in the test signal output data area (step B203). It should be noted that the signal related to the start of the normal figure change display game is a signal for turning on the normal signal per symbol, and the signal relating to the start of the normal electric operation is a signal for turning on the signal for operating the normal electric accessory 1 It is.

Next, in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the ordinary electric solenoid, ON data is saved in the ordinary electric solenoid output data area (step B204).
In addition, the information on the normal power count number area for storing the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B205), and the normal power illegality for storing the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 during the normal power fraud monitoring period is stored. The information on the winning area is cleared (step B206). Then, a flag that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B207), and the normal process transition setting process is terminated.

[Usual processing per map]
Next, the details of the process for hitting the usual figure (step B11) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process will be described. FIG. 86 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the normal hit processing according to the first embodiment. In this process for normal maps, first, a control pointer for normal maps is loaded and prepared (step B211), and the value of the loaded control pointer for normal maps is the value of the upper limit value area for control pointers for normal maps. It is determined whether or not (the value of hit end) has been reached (step B212).

  If the value of the control pointer during the normal map does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal map (step B212; N), the control pointer during the normal map is updated by "+1" (step B213). Then, the ordinary electric operation transition setting process (step B214) is performed, and the process during the normal figure is terminated. Further, when the value of the control pointer during normal map reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during normal map (the value of end of hit) (step B212; Y), step B213 is passed and the normal power operation transition setting is made. A process (step B214) is performed, and the process during the normal drawing is terminated.

[Normal electric operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal power operation transition setting process (step B214) in the above-described normal process will be described. FIG. 87 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a normal power operation transition setting process according to the first embodiment. This normal electric operation transition setting process is a process for performing drive control of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variation winning device 37, and the process branches according to the value of the control pointer. In this ordinary power operation transition setting process, first, a branching process corresponding to the value of the control pointer is performed (step B221).

  If the value of the control pointer is “0” or “2”, the process proceeds to step B222. That is, in order to control the closing of the normal variation winning device 37, the wait time (for example, 200 ms) after the closing of the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B222). In order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B223), and the general electric operation transition setting process is terminated.

  If the value of the control pointer is “1” or “3”, the process proceeds to step B224. That is, in order to control the release of the normal variation winning device 37, the normal power release time (for example, 1700 ms), which is the opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer, is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B224), ON data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn ON the general power solenoid 37c (step B225), and the general power operation transition setting process is terminated.

  If the value of the control pointer is “4”, the process proceeds to step B226. That is, “4” is set as the process number (step B226) in order to end the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 and perform the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step B12). Then, this processing number is saved in the ordinary game processing number area (step B227), and the ordinary electric ball remaining time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area (step B228). Thereafter, in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B229), and the normal electric operation transition setting process is ended.

  Next, the normal electric operation in the normal variation winning device 37 of the first embodiment will be described using FIG. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a general electric operation timing chart of the normal variation winning device of the first embodiment. In the figure, the numbers in the squares indicate the values of the control pointers.

  The normal electric operation in the case of the winning symbol 1 in the normal variation winning device 37 is a total of 1200 ms consisting of the normal display time (600 ms), the subsequent general electric power release time (500 ms), and the remaining ball processing time (600 ms) thereafter. It is a series of operations. In the case of winning symbol 1, the value of the control pointer becomes “4” after the normal power release time elapses, and the normal power remaining ball processing is performed after the normal variable winning device 37 is released once.

  In addition, the normal power operation in the case of the winning symbol 2 in the normal variation winning device 37 is as follows: the normal signal display time (600 ms), the subsequent normal power release time (1700 ms), the subsequent wait time (200 ms), and the subsequent This is a series of operations for a total of 4800 ms, consisting of the open time (1700 ms) and the remaining ball processing time (600 ms). In the case of the winning symbol 2, the control pointer value becomes “2” after the first public power open time elapses, and the control pointer value passes through the processes corresponding to “2” and “3”. The value of the pointer is “4”. Thus, in the case of the winning symbol 2, the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process is performed after the two opening operations of the normal variation winning device 37.

  In addition, the normal power operation in the case of the winning symbol 3 in the normal variation winning device 37 is as follows: the normal signal display time (600 ms), the subsequent normal power release time (1700 ms), the subsequent wait time (200 ms), and the subsequent This is a series of operations for a total of 6700 ms, which is composed of a normal power release time (1700 ms), a subsequent wait time (200 ms), a subsequent general power release time (1700 ms), and a remaining ball processing time (600 ms). In the case of winning symbol 3, the value of the control pointer becomes “0” after the first public power open time elapses, and the values of the control pointer correspond to “0”, “1”, “2”, “3”. After each process, the value of the control pointer becomes “4”. In this way, in the case of the winning symbol 3, the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process is performed after the opening operation of the normal variation winning device 37 three times.

  Note that, during the normal time display time, the wait time, and the remaining ball processing time, the normal variation winning device 37 is closed by the off control of the general electric solenoid 37c. In addition, during the normal power release time, the normal variation winning device 37 is opened by turning on the general power solenoid 37c.

[Penden residual ball processing]
Next, the ordinary power remaining ball process (step B12) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. FIG. 89 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process according to the first embodiment. In this ordinary electric ball remaining ball process, the normal electric power end ball shift setting process (step B231) is performed, and the electric power remaining ball process is terminated.

[Usual map end process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal signal end process transition setting process (step B231) in the above-described ordinary electric power remaining ball process will be described. FIG. 90 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a normal chart end process transition setting process according to the first embodiment. In this normal figure end process transition setting process, first, the process number “5” related to the general figure end process is set (step B241), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (step B242). ).

  Thereafter, the normal ending time (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B243), and a signal related to the end of the operation of the normal variation winning device 37 is saved in the test signal output data area (step B244). The signal related to the end of the operation of the normal variation winning device 37 is a signal for turning off the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal.

  Next, the information in the general electric power count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is cleared (step B245). Then, the value of the control pointer area during normal drawing is cleared (step B246), and the normal drawing end processing transition setting processing is ended.

[End processing per regular map]
Next, the normal figure end process (step B13) in the above-described general figure game process will be described. FIG. 91 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a normal hit end process according to the first embodiment. In this normal figure end process, the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B251) is performed, and the normal figure end process ends.

[Usuzu usual process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B251) in the above-described normal figure end process will be described. FIG. 92 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the normal daily process transition setting process 2 according to the first embodiment. In this normal figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, the process number “0” related to the normal figure normal process is set (step B261), and the process number is saved in the normal figure game process number area (step B262). .

  Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of hitting of the normal game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B263). It should be noted that the signal related to the end of the normal-game variable game is a signal for turning off the normal symbol 1 variable signal.

  After that, a flag that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 (flag during fraud monitoring period) is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B264), and the normal chart normal process transition setting process 2 is terminated. .

[Segment LED editing processing]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (step S131) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of segment LED editing processing according to the first embodiment. In the segment LED editing process, settings relating to driving of the LEDs constituting the round display section 51, the special figure 1 hold display section 52, the general figure hold display section 56, and the status display section 57 provided in the collective display device 50, etc. To do.

In the segment LED editing process, first, the flashing control timer is updated by adding “1” (step C11). The blinking control timer is, for example, an 8-bit counter timer.
Next, the output hold timing of the general map hold display is determined (step C12). If it is the output on timing (step C12; Y), the general map hold number display table 1 is set (step C13), and the output on timing is set. If not (step C12; N), the general figure hold number display table 2 is set (step C14). It should be noted that the determination of the output on timing of the usual map hold display can be made by referring to a specific bit of the timer. For example, a blinking period of 128 ms can be set by referring to the fifth bit of the timer incremented by 1 every 4 ms.

  Thereafter, display data corresponding to the number of reserved general maps is acquired from the set general map hold number display table 1 or the general map hold number display table 2, and saved in the segment area (step C15). The segment area is a storage area for storing display data of the 7-segment LED_d1, the 7-segment LED_d2, and the LED_d3 to LED_d18.

  For example, the common figure hold number display table 1 and the common figure hold number display table 2 have the same values for the common figure hold numbers “0” to “2”, but different values for the common figure hold numbers “3” and “4”. It is. As a result, in the general map hold display unit 56, the corresponding LED is turned off when the general map hold number is “0”, the corresponding LED is turned on when the general map hold number is “1”, “2”, and the general map hold number is “3”. , “4” realizes blinking of the corresponding LED.

  Next, the output on timing of the special figure 1 hold display is determined (step C16), and if it is the output on timing (step C16; Y), the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (step C17) and output. When it is not the on-timing (step C16; N), the special figure 1 hold number display table 2 is set (step C18). Note that the determination of the output on timing of the special figure 1 hold display can be made the same as the determination of the output on timing of the general figure hold display. At this time, for example, by changing the reference bit of the timer that is incremented by 1 every 4 ms from the normal hold display, it is possible to set a blinking cycle different from the normal hold display.

  Thereafter, display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired from the set special figure 1 hold number display table 1 or the special figure 1 hold number display table 2 and saved in the segment area (step C19). Note that the special figure 1 hold display section 52 also realizes the LED lighting mode in the same manner as the general figure hold display section 56.

  Next, the output on timing of the special figure 2 hold display is determined (step C20), and if it is the output on timing (step C20; Y), the special figure 2 hold number display table 1 is set (step C21) and output. When it is not the on-timing (step C20; N), the special figure 2 hold number display table 2 is set (step C22). Note that the determination of the output on timing of the special figure 2 hold display can be made the same as the determination of the output on timing of the general figure hold display. At this time, for example, by changing the reference bit of the timer that is incremented by 1 every 4 ms from the normal hold display, it is possible to set a blinking cycle different from the normal hold display.

  Thereafter, display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired from the set special figure 2 hold number display table 1 or the special figure 2 hold number display table 2 and saved in the segment area (step C23). The special figure 2 hold display section 58 also realizes the LED lighting mode in the same manner as the general figure hold display section 56.

  Further, a round display LED display table in which the display mode in the round display unit 51 is defined is set (step C24), display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer is acquired, and saved in the segment area (step C25). .

Next, the game state display table 1 is set (step C26), display data corresponding to the game state display number 1 is acquired, and saved in the segment area (step C27).
Thereafter, the game state display table 2 is set (step C28), display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired, saved in the segment area (step C29), and the segment LED editing process is terminated.

  Next, magnet fraud monitoring processing and panel radio wave fraud monitoring processing for monitoring fraud will be described. A gaming machine that gives a player a predetermined game value according to the result of the game may be cheated to illegally obtain the game value. Among such fraudulent acts, gaming machines equipped with a mechanism for detecting fraudulent acts using magnets are conventionally known. There are various types of fraud, and detection methods and conditions corresponding to each type are necessary. However, the occurrence of an abnormal condition could not be accurately detected.

  In particular, misjudging that an abnormal condition has occurred despite the fact that no abnormal condition has occurred has led to mistrust of the player, and is a cause of game evasion in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is important not to perform erroneous detection of such an abnormal state.

  Therefore, the gaming machine 10 accurately detects the occurrence of an abnormal state based on the magnetic detector that detects abnormal magnetism, the radio wave detector that detects abnormal radio waves, and the detection results of the magnetic detector and radio wave detector. For example, the following magnet fraud monitoring process and panel radio wave fraud monitoring process are performed for the purpose of preventing erroneous detection of an abnormal state.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring processing]
First, the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the magnet fraud monitoring process according to the first embodiment. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 that constitutes a magnetic detector that detects abnormal magnetism, and fraud notification is started and ended. In addition, since a magnetic detector functions as a magnet detector which detects the approach of a magnet, a magnetic sensor can be paraphrased as a magnet sensor.

  In the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), is the magnetic sensor turned on, that is, whether abnormal magnetism has been detected? It is determined whether or not (step C31). When the magnetic sensor is on (step C31; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, "1" is added to the magnet fraud monitoring timer for measuring the abnormal magnetism detection period and updated (step C32). ), It is determined whether or not the magnet fraud monitoring timer has expired (step C33).

  When the magnet fraud monitoring timer expires (step C33; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period (for example, 32 ms), the abnormality is determined. When an abnormality is determined, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C34), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step C35). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step C36), a magnet fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step C37), and whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area. Determine (step C43).

  That is, the game control device 100 has a function as an abnormal state detection control unit that detects an abnormal state based on the detection result of the magnetic sensor. The game control apparatus 100 determines that an abnormal state has occurred when the magnetic sensor continuously detects abnormal magnetism over a predetermined period.

  On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor is not on (step C31; N), that is, when no abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C38), and the magnet fraud notification that defines the magnet fraud notification time is provided. If the timer is not "0", "1" is subtracted from the magnet fraud notification timer and updated (step C39). Note that the minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is “0” (step C40). In addition, also when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed up (step C33; N), it transfers to the process of step C39.

  When the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not “0” (step C40; N), that is, when the time has not expired, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is “0” (step C40; Y), that is, when the time has been up or when the time has already expired and the fraud notification period has ended, If no fraud notification has been made, a command for terminating magnet fraud notification is prepared (step C41). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step C42), and it is determined whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step C43).

  If the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step C43; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step C43; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step C44), a production command setting process is performed (step C45), and the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. To do.

[Board radio fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S133) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of board radio wave fraud monitoring processing according to the first embodiment. In the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 that forms a radio wave detector that detects an abnormal radio wave, and fraud notification is started or stopped.

  In the board radio wave fraud monitoring processing, first, the board radio wave sensor is turned on from the state of the detection signal output from the board radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121. That is, it is determined whether or not an abnormal radio wave is detected (step C51). When the panel radio wave sensor is on (step C51; Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step C52).

  Then, a board radio fraud notification command is prepared (step C53), a board radio fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a board radio fraud flag (step C54), and the prepared board radio fraud flag is set to the value of the board radio fraud flag area. It is determined whether they match (step C59). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

  That is, the game control device 100 has a function as an abnormal state detection control unit that detects the occurrence of an abnormal state based on the detection result of the board radio wave sensor. Then, the game control device 100 determines that an abnormal state has occurred only when the board radio wave sensor detects a single abnormal radio wave.

  On the other hand, when the panel radio wave sensor is not on (step C51; N), that is, when no abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification is not performed unless the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is “0”. The timer is updated by subtracting “1” (step C55). The minimum value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is “0” (step C56).

  If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not “0” (step C56; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is “0” (step C56; Y), that is, when the time is up or when the time has already expired and the period of the unauthorized notification ends, If no fraud notification has been made, a command to terminate board radio fraud notification is prepared (step C57), and a board radio fraud release flag is prepared as a board radio fraud flag (step C58). It is determined whether or not the flag matches the value in the board radio wave fraud flag area (step C59).

  When the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step C59; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step C59; N), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (step C60), a production command setting process is performed (step C61), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring is performed. The process ends.

  By performing the magnet fraud monitoring process and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process as described above, it is possible to accurately detect the occurrence of an abnormal state. In other words, a gaming machine is equipped with a component that generates magnetism, such as a solenoid, but when it detects magnetism continuously over a predetermined period of time, it is determined to be in an abnormal state. Generation can be prevented from being erroneously detected as an abnormal state. On the other hand, since the gaming machine is not equipped with a component that emits radio waves, it is possible to minimize damage by immediately determining that an abnormal radio wave is detected as an abnormal state.

  In the first embodiment, the detection of abnormal magnetism is simply a state in which magnetism is detected. However, it may be a state in which magnetism stronger than the magnetic state in a state that is not in an abnormal state is detected, or a predetermined threshold value or more. The state in which magnetism is detected may be abnormal. In the first embodiment, abnormal radio waves are detected simply by receiving a radio wave. However, the radio waves may not be received in an abnormal state or received in an abnormal state. It is good also as the state which received the electromagnetic wave of a non-frequency. Moreover, it is good also considering the state which detected the electromagnetic wave whose intensity | strength is more than a predetermined threshold, or the electromagnetic wave of a specific frequency as abnormality. When the threshold value is set based on the strength of the magnetic field, the strength of the radio wave, or the frequency, a signal may be output when the threshold value is exceeded on the magnetic sensor 61 or panel radio wave sensor 62 side, or the threshold value may be set on the control device side. You may make it monitor whether it exceeded.

  From the above, the detection results of the magnetic detector (magnetic sensor 61) for detecting abnormal magnetism, the radio wave detector (panel radio wave sensor 62) for detecting abnormal radio waves, and the magnetic detector and radio wave detector And an abnormal state detection control means (game control device 100) for detecting the occurrence of an abnormal state, and the abnormal state detection control means detects abnormal magnetism continuously for a predetermined period in the case of a magnetic detector. In this case, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred. However, in the case of a radio wave detector, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred once an abnormal radio wave is detected.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S134) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. FIG. FIG. 96 is a first diagram illustrating a flowchart of external information editing processing according to the first embodiment. FIG. 97 is a second diagram illustrating a flowchart of external information editing processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the external information editing process, the monitoring results in the payout command transmission process (step S125), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S128), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S133) are displayed. Based on this, information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device is created and set in an output buffer.

  In the external information editing process, first, a process for setting information according to an error state or a security state is performed. In the process of setting information according to the error state and the security state, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step C71; Y) and a main body frame opening error is occurring (step C72; Y), the door / frame The ON signal of the release signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C73), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C74). That is, the occurrence of the glass frame opening error and the main body frame opening error is output as external information and a test signal.

  On the other hand, if neither the glass frame opening error nor the body frame opening error has occurred (steps C71 to C72; N), the off-data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S71). C75), the off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C76).

  Next, if the security signal control timer that counts a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is updated to “−1”. (Step C77). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step C78).

  When the value of the security signal control timer is not “0” (step C78; N), that is, when the time is not up, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C79). On the other hand, when the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step C78; Y), that is, when the time is up, the process of step C79 is passed. In other words, the initialization of the data stored in the RAM is output as external information until the security signal control timer expires.

  Magnet fraud (step C80; Y), board radio fraud (step C81; Y), frame radio fraud (step C82; Y), ordinary electric fraud (step C83; Y), or a grand prize When mouth fraud is occurring (step C84; Y), the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C85), and the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step C86).

  On the other hand, if none of the magnet fraud, board radio fraud, frame radio fraud, general power fraud, or special prize opening fraud has occurred (steps C80 to C84; N), the off-state data of the gaming machine error status signal is tested. Save in the signal output data area (step C87).

  Next, in the external information editing process, a main prize ball signal editing process (step C88) for setting information related to the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a starting hole signal editing process (step C89) for editing a winning signal at the starting hole. To do. Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not “0”, “−1” is updated (step C90). Note that the minimum value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol determination number control timer is “0” (step C91).

  When the value of the symbol determination count control timer is “0” (step C91; Y), that is, when the time is up or when the time has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination frequency signal is stored in the external information output data area. Save (step C92), the external information editing process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the symbol determination count control timer is not “0” (step C91; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on data of the symbol determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S91). C93), the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step C88) in the external information editing process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main prize ball signal editing process of the first embodiment. The main prize ball signal editing process is a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out, scheduled game medium payout number) generated by winning the winning a prize becomes a predetermined number (here, 10). Is output to the external device.

  In the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not “0”, “−1” is updated (step C101). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is “0” (step C102). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is “0” (step C102; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of main prize ball signal outputs is “0” (step C103).

  If the main prize ball signal output count is not “0” (step C103; N), the main prize ball signal output count is updated by “−1” (step C104), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area is updated to the main prize ball signal output control timer area. The initial value of the prize ball signal output control timer is saved (step C105). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time (eg, 128 ms) of the on state (eg, high level) of the main prize ball signal and the time (eg, 64 ms) of the off state (eg, low level). It is time (for example, 192 ms). Thereafter, on data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C107), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated. If the main prize ball signal output count is 0 (step C103; Y), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S103). C108), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step C102; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step C106). Note that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON period (step C106; Y), the process proceeds to step C107. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step C106; N), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step C108), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

  Through the above processing, information related to the scheduled game medium payout number is transmitted to the outside. After the payout condition based on the game ball winning is established, it is faster to generate and send the main prize ball signal than to complete the payout of the game ball by operating the payout device. Between the time when the payout condition is satisfied and the time when the number of game media to be paid out is paid out, information related to the planned number of game media payouts, which is the number of game media to be paid out, is output to the outside.

  That is, the game control device 100 can output information on the planned number of game media payouts, which is the number of game media to be paid out, after the payout conditions are satisfied and before paying out the number of game media to be paid out. To provide an external output means.

  However, if the number of award balls generated is small, and if this amount is not less than a predetermined number (for example, 10) even if it is added to the value of the remaining number of award balls, information on the expected number of game media payouts after the actual payout has been completed May be output. By reducing the unit of the scheduled game medium payout number corresponding to one main prize ball signal (for example, “1”), the payout condition is always satisfied until the payout number of game media is paid out. In the meantime, it is also possible to output information related to the scheduled number of game media payouts, which is the number of game media scheduled to be paid out.

  Based on the above, a payout device (payout unit) capable of paying out game media, and control means (game control) for controlling the payout device to pay out a predetermined amount of game media based on establishment of a predetermined payout condition In the gaming machine provided with the device 100 and the payout control device 200), the control means is the number of game media to be paid out after the payout condition is satisfied and before the payout number of game media is paid out. This means that external output means (game control device 100) capable of outputting information on the number of scheduled game medium payouts to the outside is provided. Note that it is also possible to apply this configuration to a slot machine using a game medium as a medal.

  The external output means (game control apparatus 100) is based on storage means (game control apparatus 100) having a game medium storage area for storing the number of game game payouts that have not been output to the outside, and establishment of a payout condition. Addition means (game control device 100) for adding the scheduled game medium payout number corresponding to the established payout condition to the game medium storage area, and the predetermined game medium payout number stored in the game medium storage area has reached a predetermined number Based on this, the transmission means (game control device 100) for transmitting the predetermined number of scheduled game medium payout numbers to the outside, and the predetermined number of scheduled game medium payout numbers transmitted by the transmission means are subtracted from the game medium storage area. Subtracting means (game control device 100).

Here, the transmission timing of the main prize ball signal will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a transmission timing chart of the main prize ball signal according to the first embodiment.
For example, the game control device 100 outputs one pulse (main prize ball signal) for each predetermined unit number (for example, 10) of game media to be paid out. The output signal of the main prize ball signal rises from “OFF” to “ON” when the value of the output control timer is “48”, and from “ON” to “OFF” when the value of the output control timer is “16”. Until the output control timer value becomes “0”. That is, the output signal of the main prize ball signal is a 192 ms pulse signal composed of an “ON” time of 128 ms and an “OFF” time of 64 ms.

  Note that, unlike the game control device 100, the payout control device 200 outputs one pulse (prize ball signal) for each payout of a predetermined unit number (for example, 10) of game media. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can make the external device check the match between the game medium payout schedule and the game medium payout result, and can deal with illegal payout.

  In addition, in the winning during the big hit period, when the game medium is delayed due to the ball running out, and the game medium is paid out after the big hit, the external device only has a winning ball signal output by the payout control device 200. It was not possible to determine whether or not the payout was based on a win during the jackpot period. However, the game control device 100 outputs the main prize ball signal so that an external device (for example, a hall computer) can accurately collect (judge) information.

[Start signal editing process]
Next, details of the start port signal editing process (step C89) in the above-described external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the start port signal editing process according to the first embodiment. The start port signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switches 37a and 37d are input.

  In the start port signal editing process, first, if the start port signal output control timer is not “0”, “−1” is updated (step C111). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the start port signal output control timer is “0” (step C112). When the value of the start port signal output control timer is “0” (step C112; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of start port signal outputs is “0” (step C113).

  If the start port signal output count is not “0” (step C113; N), the start port signal output count is updated by “−1” (step C114), and the start port signal output is output to the start port signal output control timer area. The control timer initial value is saved (step C115). The initial value of the start port signal output control timer is obtained by adding a time (for example, 128 ms) of the start state (for example, high level) of the start port signal and a time (for example, 64 ms) of the off state (for example, low level) ( For example, 192 ms). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the start port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C117), and the start port signal editing process is terminated. When the start port signal output count is “0” (step C113; Y), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S113). C118), the start port signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the start port signal output control timer is not “0” (step C112; N), it is determined whether or not the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step C116). Note that the fact that the start port signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step C116; Y), the process proceeds to step C117. If the start port signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step C116; N), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( Step C118), the start port signal editing process is terminated.

  Next, control of the effect control device 300 will be described. The special drawing controlled by the production control device 300 is a special drawing for production displayed on the display device 41, and the special drawing in the description of the control process of the production control device 300 below is the special drawing for this production. (Decoration that is not this special figure).

[Main processing]
First, the main process of the production control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of main processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment.

The main process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started.
[Step D11] The control unit prohibits interruption.

[Step D12] The control unit performs initial setting of the CPU 311.
[Step D13] The control unit performs initial setting of the VDP 312.
[Step D14] The control unit permits an interrupt.

  [Step D15] The control unit permits generation of display data. That is, the control unit permits a display circuit (not shown) in the VDP 312 to access a VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 and generate display data.

  [Step D16] The control unit sets a random number seed. This is a process of setting a generation sequence of pseudo-random numbers using, for example, a strand function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument given to the strand function, or use a value created based on an ID value of the CPU or the like so as to differ for each gaming machine. May be.

  [Step D17] The control unit is an area to be initialized in the RWM (eg, RAM 322) of the effect control device 300 (eg, an effect flag region (a storage region used as various flags described later in the control process of the effect control device 300). ) Save the initial value at power-on.

[Step D18] The control unit clears WDT (watchdog timer).
[Step D19] The control unit executes an effect button input process. The effect button input process is a process of performing editing when the effect buttons (selection button switch 25a and decision button switch 25b) are operated when they are valid. Since the effect button does not turn on / off at high speed, the control unit may perform the process of sensing the input of the effect button within the effect button input process or within a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). Good.

  [Step D20] The control unit executes hall / player setting mode processing. The hall / player setting mode process is a process of accepting operations such as setting of a changeable range such as the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41 and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41 by the player.

  [Step D21] The control unit performs a random number update process. The random number update process is a process of updating the pseudo random number at least once every control cycle of the main process using, for example, a rand function. Since the rand function generates a random number based on a specified generation sequence every time recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain the random number only by executing the rand function. A counter that increments by “1” like the main board (game control device 100) may be used as a random number.

[Step D22] The control unit executes a received command check process. The received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.
[Step D23] The control unit executes effect display editing processing. The effect display editing process is a process of setting various commands and their parameters for instructing the VDP 312 to draw contents on the display device 41. For example, the control unit sets commands in a table form in the effect display editing process.

  [Step D24] The control unit executes drawing command preparation end setting. The drawing command preparation end setting is a process for setting that preparation of all commands to the VDP 312 set in the effect display editing process is completed.

  [Step D25] The control unit determines whether or not it is a frame switching timing. If the frame switching timing, the control unit proceeds to Step D26, and if not the frame switching timing, waits for the frame switching timing. Here, the frame switching timing is a time corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 seconds≈33.333 ms) created based on a cycle (for example, 1/60 seconds) of a V blank interrupt (also referred to as a V sync interrupt). It is the timing that arrives at a target interval. Note that the V blank interrupt occurs every time one scan of the entire screen for drawing is completed by the VDP 312. The generation period of the V blank interrupt is 1/60 seconds, for example, as described above. In the case of the present embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and the V blank interrupt is generated twice, the frame switching is performed, and the cycle of the frame switching timing is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 second). (For example, 1/30 seconds≈33.33 ms). However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, frame switching (image update) may be performed at a period of 1/30 seconds or more, or 1/30 seconds or less. Frame switching may be performed periodically.

  Subsequent processes (step D26 to step D31 and subsequent steps D18 to D24) are executed at the frame switching timing for each processing cycle by the frame switching timing determination process. Note that time management that needs to be synchronized with the contents of the effects is performed in units of frames (that is, in units of the processing cycles). When the processing cycle is 1/30 seconds, for example, 3 frames is 100 ms. This is similar to the case where the main board (game control device) manages time values in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt period.

  [Step D26] The control unit instructs the VDP 312 to draw a screen in accordance with the command set in Step D23. For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table shape and instructs the VDP 312 to draw a screen.

  [Step D27] The control unit executes a sound control process. The sound control process is a process related to volume control of sound from speakers (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The control unit executes a decoration control process. The decoration control process is a process for controlling various LEDs and the like of the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, the point indicator 49, and the like.
[Step D29] The control unit executes a movable body control process. The movable body control process is a process for controlling a movable body (for example, the board effect device 44) including various motors and SOL (solenoid).

  [Step D30] The control unit executes a firing information control process. The launch information control process sets launch-related information based on the launch state flag, and produces an effect corresponding to the special figure rotation state (the number of special figure changes per game for a predetermined amount (that is, a predetermined number of rental balls)) This is a process for correcting the mode.

  [Step D31] The control unit executes point control processing. The point control process is a process for performing management of the accumulated value of the number of points given when the winning of the point gate 48 is detected, and control of granting the privilege according to the accumulated value of the number of points.

  The control unit returns to step D18 after executing step D31, and thereafter repeatedly executes the processing from step D18 to step D31. That is, Step D18 to Step D31 constitute a loop process (sometimes referred to as a main loop process) that is repeatedly executed at the above-described processing cycle after the production control device 300 is activated.

  Note that the control unit executes the processing from step D27 to step D29 in the main loop processing in order to match the presentation of the screen, but the signals and data (particularly various LEDs and motors) generated or set by these control processing. The process of actually outputting a drive control signal or the like to the port is performed in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). However, in the case where an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there is a case where a signal or the like is not output by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

[Received command check processing]
Next, the received command check process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a view illustrating a flowchart of a received command check process in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command check process is a process executed by the control unit in step D22 of the main process.

  The received command (effect command) includes MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte). The effect command is sent from the game control device (main board) 100 to the effect control device 300. Are sent sequentially. Hereinafter, such data constituting a command is referred to as command data or command data.

  The process of receiving a command from the main board is performed by a “command reception interrupt process” (not shown). In other words, in the serial communication of this example, transmission / reception is automatically performed by hardware (by the function of the CPU itself), and when reception of the command is completed, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) is generated and notified. It is only necessary to take out from the buffer, but in the above “command reception interrupt processing”, every time there is a command reception interrupt, the command is loaded from the serial reception buffer and the loaded command data is checked for any abnormalities. Data (MODE and ACTION data) is stored in the command buffer, and the value of the command reception counter is increased by “1” by the stored amount. In the description of the control process, simply “storing” means storing the data in a predetermined storage area so that it can be read out for use in later control processing (the same applies hereinafter). The command buffer is, for example, a ring buffer. This command buffer is constituted by a storage area in the RAM 311a (or RAM 322) of the CPU 311, for example. The capacity of the command buffer only needs to be equal to or greater than the number of commands that can be transmitted from the main board in the system control cycle (the above-described processing cycle; for example, 1/30 second).

  [Step D41] The control unit loads the value of the command reception counter as the command reception number. The command reception counter is set in RWM (RAM 322 or RAM 311a). Since the command reception counter is cleared to “0” in principle in step D43, the command reception counter stores the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 second) (time corresponding to one cycle of the above-described processing cycle).

  [Step D42] The control unit determines whether or not the command reception number is “0 (zero)”. If the command reception number is not “0”, the control unit proceeds to step D43, and if the command reception number is “0”. The received command check process is terminated. In the present application, as in step D41, “loading” data in the control process means extracting data from the RAM (RAM 322 or RAM 311a in the effect control apparatus 300 of this example).

[Step D43] The control unit subtracts the content of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) by the number of command receptions.
Assuming that A is the value of the command reception counter and B is the number of received commands, “A = B” immediately after execution of step D41. The normal movement is “A = A−B = 0” immediately after execution of step D43. However, in the aspect of this example, the effect control device 300 receives a command reception interrupt from the game control device (main board) 100. Is given the highest priority without prohibiting interrupts, so the value of A may increase between the process of step D41 and the process of step D43. Therefore, if the process of step D43 is set to “A ← 0” (that is, the process of setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the count of the command is shifted. Therefore, in step D43, the subtraction process “A−B” is performed. I'm doing it. However, when serial communication is used for transmission / reception of commands from the main board as in this embodiment, the interrupt is disabled so that the value of A does not increase during the processing from step D41 to step D153. Then, the processing content of step D43 may be “A ← 0”.

  [Step D44] The control unit stores the contents of the received command buffer (corresponding to a command buffer, which may be simply referred to as a command buffer hereinafter) (that is, command data stored at an address corresponding to a read pointer of the command buffer). Copy to the command area (sometimes called the command storage area). The command area is, for example, a storage area in the RAM 322 or the RAM 311a, and is a so-called FIFO format (first-in first-out format) buffer.

  [Step D45] Since the control unit has read the data in the command buffer, the control unit updates the value of the command read index, which is the command buffer read pointer, by, for example, “1” in the range of “0” to “31”. Do it. The range from “0” to “31” here corresponds to the capacity of the command buffer (for example, “32”).

  [Step D46] The control unit determines whether or not copying of commands for the number of received commands has been completed (that is, whether or not Steps D44 and D45 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when copying of commands for the number of received commands is completed, and proceeds to step D44 when copying is not completed.

  [Step D47] The control unit loads (that is, reads) the contents of the command area (data stored first among the data that has not yet been read in the command area, that is, data to be read next). To do.

  [Step D48] The control unit executes a received command analysis process. The received command analysis process is a process of analyzing data of a loaded command (hereinafter referred to as the current command). The received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Step D49] The control unit updates the address of the command area (the address of the data to be read next).
[Step D50] The control unit determines whether or not the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (that is, whether or not the steps D47 to D49 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when the command for the number of received commands has not been analyzed, and ends the received command check process when the analysis is completed.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a view illustrating a flowchart of a received command analysis process in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command analysis process is a process executed by the control unit in step D48 of the received command check process.

  [Step D51] The control unit stores the upper byte of the data of the current command loaded in step D47 of the received command check process separately in MODE and the lower byte in ACT. In the case of a fluctuation-type command for instructing a special pattern fluctuation pattern, the upper byte data stored as MODE commands the first half fluctuation pattern, and the lower byte data stored as ACT commands the second half fluctuation pattern. Is.

  [Step D52] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE value separated in Step D51 is within a normal range. The control unit proceeds to step D53 when the MODE value is within the normal range, and ends the received command analysis processing when the MODE value is not within the normal range. Note that the MODE value may be a value that is not defined and is not used. If the MODE value is not used, it is determined in step D52 that the value is not in the normal range.

  [Step D53] The control unit determines whether or not the ACT value separated in Step D51 is within a normal range. The control unit proceeds to step D54 when the ACT value is in the normal range, and ends the received command analysis process when the ACT value is not in the normal range.

  Further, in step D53, it is determined as follows, for example, whether or not the ACT value separated in step D51 is within the normal range. That is, the effective ACT value is different for each MODE, and the upper and lower limits of the effective value of this ACT are defined in a predetermined ACTION check table (not shown). In step D53, the values are separated into the upper and lower limits. Whether the ACT value is within the range is checked, and if it is within the range, it is determined that the value is within the normal range (at this point, the missing tooth check described later cannot be performed).

  [Step D54] The control unit determines whether or not the separated ACT value with respect to the separated MODE value is a correct combination. The control unit proceeds to step D55 when the ACT value is the correct combination, and ends the received command analysis process when the ACT value is not the correct combination. Whether or not the ACT values are the correct combination can be determined using, for example, a match check table. The coincidence check table is a table in which all ACT values (ACTION values) that are valid for the MODE value are registered in order from the top address, and is provided for each MODE value. Then, if there is a separated ACT value in this match check table corresponding to the MODE value, it can be determined that the combination is correct, and if there is no separated ACT value in the match check table, it is correct. It can be determined that it is not a combination.

  It should be noted that the determination of whether or not the ACT value is a correct combination is performed including a missing tooth check that determines whether or not the ACT value is a normal ACT combination. There are multiple valid ACTs for one MODE, but these values are not always continuous (ie, there are values that do not exist discontinuously, values that are missing). It is confirmed whether or not is a valid value. Since only the valid values are defined in the coincidence check table, it is compared and confirmed one by one whether it matches any of them.

  [Step D55] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the variable command range. The control unit executes the variable command process (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the variable command range (step D56), and proceeds to step D57 when the MODE data is not within the variable command range. .

  Here, the MODE data is the MODE data separated and stored in step D51 (the same applies to step D57 described later). A fluctuation command (sometimes referred to as a fluctuation command or a fluctuation pattern command) is a command for instructing a fluctuation pattern of a special figure, and the range that the data of the fluctuation command can take is a fluctuation command range.

  [Step D57] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the jackpot command range. The control unit executes the jackpot command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the jackpot command range (step D58), and proceeds to step D59 when the MODE data is not within the jackpot command range. . The jackpot command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) related to the jackpot effect, and the range that the data of the jackpot command can take is the jackpot command range.

  [Step D59] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the symbol system command range. The control unit executes symbol command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the symbol command range (step D60), and proceeds to step D61 when the MODE data is not within the symbol command range. . A symbol-related command (sometimes referred to as a symbol command or a decorative special symbol command) is a command for instructing information related to a special symbol symbol (for example, what is to be a special symbol stop symbol). The range that the data can take is the symbol-type command range.

  [Step D61] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the single-shot command range. The control unit executes single-shot command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the single-shot command range (step D62), and proceeds to step D63 when the MODE data is not within the single-shot command range. . Unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands, commands that are established independently are called single-shot commands. Single-shot commands (sometimes referred to as single-shot commands) include a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model designation command, and the like. The range that the single command data can take is the single command range.

  [Step D63] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the pre-read symbol command range. The control unit executes pre-read symbol system command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the pre-read symbol system command range (step D64), and if the MODE data is not within the pre-read symbol system command range, step Proceed to D65.

  [Step D65] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the prefetch fluctuation command range. The control unit executes prefetch fluctuation command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the prefetch fluctuation command range (step D66), and is received when the MODE data is not within the prefetch fluctuation command range. The command analysis process ends. Note that the prefetch symbol command and the prefetch variation command are commands for prefetch effects.

  Here, the pre-reading effect (also referred to as a pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is a variable display game corresponding to a start winning memory (a start winning memory is held or simply held) in which a special display variable display game is not executed. In order to notify the player in advance with a certain degree of reliability whether or not the game will be a big hit when it is executed afterwards, the start winning memory is displayed in a different manner than usual. Etc. The prefetch command (prefetch variation command and prefetch symbol command) is a command for informing the change pattern corresponding to the hold of the start winning memory to be prefetched and the stop symbol in advance. It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Note that normal variation commands and symbol commands that are not prefetched are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variation display.

[Point control processing]
First, a point game that is a target of point control will be described. The point game is a game effect in which the points given upon winning detection (passage detection) of the point gate 48 are accumulated, and the accumulated value of the number of points is exchanged for benefits at a predetermined opportunity and given to the player. . The privilege to be given is that the effect control device 300 executes an effect that appears only in an ordinary game with an appearance frequency that is low or exchanged for the accumulated value of the number of points.

  Next, the point control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of point control processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The point control process is a process executed by the control unit in step D31 of the main process.

  [Step D71] The control unit executes a point initialization process. The point initialization process is a process for initializing the accumulated value of the number of points and the privilege granted to the player at a predetermined initialization opportunity. The point initialization process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  [Step D72] The control unit executes point update processing. The point update process is a process for updating the accumulated value of the number of points at a predetermined opportunity. The point update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  [Step D73] The control unit executes point exchange processing. The point exchange process is a process for exchanging the accumulated value of the number of points for a privilege that is given to the player at a predetermined opportunity. The point exchange process will be described later with reference to FIG. The control unit ends the point control process after executing the point exchange process.

[Point initialization processing]
Next, the point initialization process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a flowchart of point initialization processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The point initialization process is a process executed by the control unit in step D71 of the point control process. The point initialization process includes a process related to the initialization of the accumulated point value and a process related to resetting the privilege given by the point exchange.

  [Step D81] The control unit acquires state information. The state information is information for determining a reset trigger for the accumulated point value (the accumulated value of the number of points). For example, the state information includes the game state of a special figure game or a general game as the game control state information, and the control state associated with the provision of benefits in the initial state after turning on the effect control device 300 or the point game as the effect control state information Etc.

  [Step D82] The control unit determines whether or not the state specified from the acquired state information is a state that triggers the resetting of the accumulated point value. The control unit proceeds to step D83 when the state is not a reset trigger, and proceeds to step D85 when the reset is a state.

  For example, the control unit can determine that the initial state after the power is turned on is a trigger for resetting the accumulated point value. Thereby, the control part can reset a point accumulated value in the initial state after power activation. In addition, the control part can hold | maintain the point accumulated value at the time of a power failure detection, without resetting a point accumulated value at the time of power activation after a power failure recovery. In addition, the control unit can determine that the privilege grant based on the point accumulated value is a reset opportunity of the point accumulated value. In addition, the control unit can determine that the gaming state such as the occurrence of jackpot is a reset trigger for the accumulated point value.

  [Step D83] The control unit obtains a point accumulated value reset timer. The point accumulated value reset timer is a timer for determining the point accumulated value reset trigger as time elapses. For example, the control unit sets the monitoring time (for example, 5 minutes) in the point accumulated value reset timer when detecting the customer waiting state. Thereby, the control part can make the timing which the customer waiting state continued only for monitoring time the reset opportunity of a point accumulated value.

  [Step D84] The control unit determines whether or not it is a timing for resetting the accumulated point value based on the accumulated point value reset timer. The control unit proceeds to step D85 when it is a timing for resetting the accumulated point value, and proceeds to step D86 when it is not a timing for resetting the accumulated point value.

  [Step D85] The control unit resets the point accumulated value (for example, clears “0”). The accumulated point value does not necessarily have to be reset by clearing “0”, but may be reset by setting a random initial value (for example, “5”, “10”, etc.).

  [Step D86] The control unit determines whether or not the state specified from the state information acquired in Step D81 is a state that triggers a reset of the privilege granted by the point exchange. The control unit proceeds to step D87 when the state is a reset trigger, and ends the point initialization process when it is not the reset trigger.

  For example, when the bonus given by the point exchange is a special effect during the big hit (for example, special video output or audio output), the control unit is a chance to reset the bonus given by the point exchange. Can be determined. In addition, when the bonus granted by exchanging points is a special effect during normal games (for example, special video output, audio output, etc.), it is determined that the occurrence of a big hit is a reset opportunity for the bonus granted by exchanging points Can do. Thereby, the control part can clarify the end of the privilege provided by point exchange.

  [Step D87] The control unit acquires a privilege grant reset timer. The privilege grant reset timer is a timer for determining a reset opportunity of the granted privilege over time. For example, the control unit sets the duration (for example, 10 minutes) in the privilege grant reset timer when the privilege is granted. Thereby, the control part can be set as the reset opportunity of the privilege which provided the timing which the privilege provision state continued only for continuation time.

  [Step D88] The control unit determines whether or not it is a timing for resetting the privilege granted based on the privilege grant reset timer. A control part progresses to step D89, when it is the timing used as the reset opportunity of the provided privilege, and complete | finishes a point initialization process, when it is not the timing used as the reset opportunity of the provided privilege.

[Step D89] The control unit resets the granted privilege (for example, returns from the special effect to the normal effect), and ends the point initialization process.
Note that the gaming machine 10 may use the opportunity for resetting the granted privilege as detection of a change of the player, and in this case, the gaming machine 10 accumulates the first privilege that has been granted first and adds the second privilege to the player. You may make it give to. For example, the player can simultaneously enjoy a special display effect (for example, background display) as the first privilege and a special sound effect (for example, BGM (background music) output) as the second privilege.

  In addition, when the gaming machine 10 accumulates the privilege and gives it to the player, the second privilege may be granted on condition that the first privilege is given. For example, when the player enjoys a special display effect (for example, background display) as the first privilege, the player can enjoy a special display effect (for example, premium background display) as the second privilege.

[Point update processing]
Next, the point update process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 106 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of point update processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The point update process is a process executed by the control unit in step D72 of the point control process. The point update process is a process of determining the number of points given when winning of the point gate 48 is detected and updating the accumulated point value.

  [Step D91] The control unit acquires state information. The state information is information for determining a point to be awarded according to the valid state of the point gate 48 and the gaming state at the time of winning to the point gate 48. For example, the state information includes the game state of a special figure game or a general game as the game control state information, and the control state associated with the provision of benefits in the initial state after turning on the effect control device 300 or the point game as the effect control state information Etc.

  [Step D92] The control unit determines whether or not the state specified from the acquired state information is a valid state of the point gate 48. The control unit proceeds to step D93 when it is in the valid state, and ends the point update process when it is not in the valid state.

  [Step D93] The control unit determines whether or not there is a winning detection of the point gate 48. The control unit proceeds to step D94 when there is a winning detection, and ends the point update process when there is no winning detection. Note that the control unit can perform a process of sensing an input change of the point gate 48 within a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown), and whether or not there is a winning detection of the point gate 48 with reference to the sensing result. Can be determined.

  [Step D94] The control unit obtains a random number for lottery for determining the number of points given when winning detection of the point gate 48 is detected. Note that the random number for lottery may be a counter value that is updated at a sufficiently high speed with respect to a winning opportunity of the point gate 48.

  [Step D95] The control unit refers to the point table. Here, the point table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a diagram illustrating an example of the point table according to the first embodiment.

  The point table is data including an item “gaming state”, an item “judgment value”, and an item “addition point”. The item “gaming state” includes a gaming state A, a gaming state B, a gaming state C, and a gaming state D. For example, the gaming state A is a normal gaming state in a special figure game, the gaming state B is a short and medium gaming state in a special figure game, the gaming state C is a probability changing gaming state in the special figure game, and the gaming state D is It is a game state during a big hit in a special game. It should be noted that any one of the game state A, the game state B, the game state C, and the game state D can be arbitrarily set. For example, the gaming state C may be assigned a gaming state during small hitting, or a gaming state from the occurrence of small hitting until a predetermined time elapses, instead of being assigned a probability changing gaming state. Further, the game state A, the game state B, the game state C, and the game state D may be assigned with two or more game states. For example, the game state B is a short-time medium game state or a probabilistic game state. May be assigned.

  The item “determination value” is a determination value corresponding to the random number for lottery acquired in step D94 (for example, a uniform random number from “0” to “255”). The item “addition point” indicates an addition point corresponding to the item “game state” and the item “determination value”. For example, the point table indicates that in the gaming state corresponding to the gaming state A, when the random number for lottery is “0” to “250”, the addition point is “1”, and the random number for lottery is changed from “251” to “ "254" indicates that the addition point is "2", and when the random number for lottery is "255", the addition point is "5". The point table indicates that in the gaming state corresponding to the gaming state B, when the random number for lottery is “0” to “100”, the addition point is “1”, and the random number for lottery is changed from “101” to “100”. When 250, the addition point is “2”, and when the lottery random number is “251” to “255”, the addition point is “5”. The point table indicates that, in the gaming state corresponding to the gaming state C, when the random number for lottery is “0” to “200”, the addition point is “1”, and the random number for lottery is changed from “201” to “200”. When 250, the addition point is “2”, and when the lottery random number is “251” to “255”, the addition point is “5”. Further, the point table indicates that in the gaming state corresponding to the gaming state D, the addition point is “5” when the random number for lottery is “0” to “255”.

Thereby, even if the gaming state is the same, the gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the point game by changing the addition points using the random numbers for lottery.
Also, the point table can vary the expected value of the added points given in each gaming state by varying the judgment values of the gaming state A, the gaming state B, the gaming state C, and the gaming state D. Can do. In addition, the point table may fix the addition points regardless of the lottery random number as shown in the gaming state D. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the point game by the level of the expected value according to the gaming state. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can suggest the gaming state to the player from the size of the added points when the gaming state is not clearly indicated (for example, latent probability change), and can improve the interest of the point game. .

Returning to the description of the point update processing using FIG.
[Step D96] The control unit determines an addition point from the state information acquired in Step D91, the lottery random number acquired in the random number for lottery step D94, and the point table.

  [Step D97] The control unit adds the added point to the point accumulated value to update the point accumulated value, and ends the point updating process. When the point accumulated value reaches the upper limit value by updating, the surplus portion may be rounded down using the point accumulated value as the upper limit value.

  Next, the point accumulation value update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a diagram illustrating a display example of the point indicator in the point cumulative value update process according to the first embodiment. The gaming machine 10 can display the point accumulated value on the two-digit 7-segment LEDs 49a and 49b of the point display 49 by executing the point update process. Thereby, in the gaming state A, the gaming machine 10 sets the point accumulated value to “1”, “2”, ““ for each winning to the point gate 48 as shown in the display example (a1) to the display example (a3). 3 ”can be updated. By such “1” increment update, the gaming machine 10 can provide a new interest called point game to the player.

  Further, in the gaming state D, the gaming machine 10 sets the point accumulated value “1”, “6”, “11” for each winning to the point gate 48 as shown in the display example (b1) to the display example (b3). Can be updated. By such “5” increment update, the gaming machine 10 can provide an entertainment with a change in value according to the gaming state to the player.

  Further, in the gaming state that is not clearly indicated, the gaming machine 10 sets the point accumulated value to “1”, “6”, ““ for each winning to the point gate 48 as shown in the display example (c1) to the display example (c3). 7 ”. By such an incremental update in which a plurality of types of addition values are mixed, the gaming machine 10 can provide an entertainment with various value changes to the player according to the gaming state. Further, the gaming machine 10 can provide an entertainment that suggests to the player a gaming state that is not clearly indicated, and that the player estimates the current gaming state. For example, the point accumulation value update process as shown in the display example (c1) to the display example (c3) indicates the possibility of the game state D among the game state A, the game state B, the game state C, and the game state D. Deny. In addition, in the point accumulation value update process as shown in the display example (c1) to the display example (c3), the current gaming state is the gaming state A, the gaming state B, or the gaming state C from the appearance frequency of the added value. To suggest.

That is, the point indicator 49 can function not only as a point accumulated value display means in a point game but also as a game state notification means.
Note that the gaming machine 10 may suggest the gaming state to the player by the display mode of the 7-segment LEDs 49a and 49b. For example, the display mode of the 7-segment LEDs 49a and 49b is changed from the lighting display to the blinking display in the gaming state where the point addition value is larger than the other gaming states as shown in the display example (b1) to the display example (b3). It may be.

  Note that the point indicator 49 displays the point accumulated value, but when the point accumulated value is updated, the point added value may be displayed for a predetermined time. Thereby, the player can grasp | ascertain easily the magnitude | size of the point added to a point accumulated value. Further, the gaming machine 10 may notify the player of the update of the accumulated point value by using sound effects, other lighting, or the like when the accumulated point value is updated. Further, the gaming machine 10 may change the notification mode according to the size of the point added to the accumulated point value. Thereby, the player can grasp | ascertain easily the timing which adds a point to a point accumulated value, and the magnitude | size of the point added to a point accumulated value.

[Point exchange processing]
Next, the point exchange process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of point exchange processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The point exchange process is a process executed by the control unit in step D73 of the point control process. The point exchange process is a process of exchanging the accumulated point value for a privilege.

  [Step D101] The control unit acquires point exchange control information. The point exchange control information is control information related to the progress management of the point game. By referring to the point exchange control information, the control unit determines whether or not points can be added, whether or not a privilege can be exchanged, whether or not a privilege is being granted, a selection operation related to point exchange (privilege selection) It is possible to determine whether or not the operation is in progress.

  [Step D102] The control unit determines whether or not a privilege grant selection operation is being performed from the acquired point exchange control information. The control unit can determine that the privilege grant selection operation is being performed when the privilege grant selection operation control state is set in step D105 described below. The control unit proceeds to step D103 when the privilege grant selection operation is not being performed, and proceeds to step D107 when the privilege grant selection operation is being performed.

[Step D103] The control unit acquires a point accumulated value.
[Step D104] The control unit determines whether a point exchange condition is satisfied. For example, the control unit determines that the point exchange condition is satisfied when the privilege can be exchanged and the accumulated point value reaches an upper limit value (for example, “100”). The control unit proceeds to step D105 when the point exchange condition is satisfied, and ends the point exchange process when the point exchange condition is not satisfied.

  [Step D105] The control unit sets a privilege grant selection operation control state. The privilege grant selection operation control state is a control state in which a player selects a privilege to be granted, displays privilege options and operation guidance on the display device 41, and a selection button switch 25a and a decision button for privilege selection operation. This is a state in which an operation input from the switch 25b can be received. The control unit can display the privilege options and the operation guidance on the display device 41 by executing the effect display editing process (step D23 of the main process) based on the privilege grant selection operation control state. In addition, the control unit executes the effect button input process (step D19 of the main process) based on the privilege grant selection operation control state, thereby allowing the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b for the privilege selection operation. An operation input can be accepted.

[Step D106] The control unit resets the accumulated point value and ends the point exchange process.
[Step D107] The control unit determines whether or not the player has determined a privilege. The control unit can determine whether or not the player has determined a privilege based on an operation input from the determination button switch 25b during the operation reception time. In addition, the control part can be considered that the player has determined the privilege set as default or the privilege during the selection operation when there is no operation input from the determination button switch 25b during the operation reception time.

  [Step D108] The control unit sets a privilege determined as a grant target by the player. The control unit performs an effect display editing process (step D23 of the main process) based on the privilege set, thereby displaying a video effect as a privilege on the display device 41, or displaying an audio effect as a privilege as a speaker (upper speaker). 19a and the lower speaker 19b), or an operating body such as the board effect device 44 can be operated. A control part complete | finishes a point exchange process, after setting a privilege.

  In addition, although the gaming machine 10 selects and determines a privilege to be granted by the player, the gaming machine 10 may grant a predetermined privilege without accepting the player's operation. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may randomly select one from a plurality of choices or may select according to a predetermined condition when granting a privilege without accepting a player's operation.

  Here, privilege options and operation guidance displayed on the display device 41 by the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a diagram illustrating an example of a privilege selection operation screen displayed on the display device according to the first embodiment.

  The selection operation display 900 is a display including privilege options and operation guidance that the gaming machine 10 displays on the display device 41. The selection operation display 900 includes a point game related display 910 and a special game game display 914. The point game related display 910 is a display related to the point game, and includes an operation guide display 911 and a premium effect (point game privilege) option display 912. The operation guidance display 911 is a display that guides the player through the visual information such as characters, pictures, icons, etc. regarding the operation method related to the point game privilege grant. Further, the operation guidance display 911 guides the operation method by specifying the option setting section (selection button switch 25a and decision button switch 25b) 25 as the operation guidance display 911a.

  The option display 912 displays options that can be selected as a point game benefit. For example, the option display 912 displays a display effect A, a display effect B, and a display effect C as display effect options. The display effects include, for example, special background display, symbol display, and character display, as well as fluctuating effects such as an explicit game state, a special reach, etc. In addition, the option display 912 displays the sound effect A, the sound effect B, and the sound effect C as sound effect options. The sound effects include, for example, special BGM, sound effects, sound notification of a game state that is not normally notified, and the like. The option display 912 is an explicit display that clearly indicates the option that is being selected based on the operation input of the selection button switch 25a, or the option that is determined based on the operation input of the determination button switch 25b. Explicit display) 913 is displayed.

  The special figure game display 914 is a display that includes at least a part of the display content related to the game state of the special figure game displayed on the display device 41 before the selection operation display 900 is displayed. For example, the special figure game display 914 clearly indicates that the special figure game is variably displayed when the special figure game is variably displayed. The special figure game display 914 is not limited to the special figure game as long as it displays information before the option display 912. Thereby, even if the display content of the display device 41 is switched to the selection operation display 900, the gaming machine 10 can grasp the information about the display before switching, and the selection operation display 900 misses the opportunity to make a judgment about the game. To prevent.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a privilege in a format that can be directly felt by the player, such as video output or audio output, but may be a privilege in a format that can be indirectly felt by the player. For example, instead of presenting a special video or audio to the player, the gaming machine 10 produces an effect vibration used for determining a specific effect mode when the effect control device 300 receives a command from the game control device 100. The minute table may be replaced with a special performance distribution table. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 increases an opportunity to present a player with a performance mode having a low appearance frequency as a privilege, or an opportunity to present a performance mode with a low expected value for a big hit to a player as a privilege. It can be reduced. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform an expected value effect different from the normal time as a privilege, and can improve the interest of the player.

  Note that such a gaming machine 10 can provide diversification of opportunities for players to be interested without requiring cooperation with portable devices such as mobile phones and smartphones in recent years. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can provide diversification of opportunities for the player to be interested even for a player who is not accustomed to the operation of the portable device or a player who does not have the portable device.

The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a point gate 48 and a point display 49 on the front side. The point gate 48 includes a point switch 48a, and the point switch 48a detects a game ball that has won (including passing) the point gate 48. The gaming machine 10 determines a predetermined number of points triggered by winning detection of the point gate 48 (detection of game media including passage detection). The gaming machine 10 calculates a point accumulation value obtained by accumulating the determined number of points over a predetermined period (including a period in a predetermined state). The point display 49 displays the point accumulated value. The gaming machine 10 exchanges a point accumulated value of a predetermined size for a privilege. The privilege to be exchanged is an effect aspect that can be presented by the effect control device 300. Moreover, the privilege to be exchanged is an effect aspect that does not involve the game control device 100.

  (2) The gaming machine 10 displays the selection operation display 900 on the display device 41. The selection operation display 900 includes a point game related display 910 and a special game game display 914. The point game related display 910 includes an operation guidance display 911 and an option display 912.

  (3) The gaming machine 10 allows the player to select a privilege presented on the option display 912 by using the option setting unit (selection button switch 25a and determination button switch 25b) 25.

(4) The gaming machine 10 can vary the size of the number of points determined by winning detection (passage detection) of the point gate 48 according to the gaming state.
(5) The gaming machine 10 is provided with a point gate 48 in the vicinity of the start winning opening serving as a start opportunity of the variable display game that can give the player a game value in relation to the derived result mode.

(6) The gaming machine 10 is provided with a point gate 48 at a position where there is no chance to win another winning opening.
[Modification 1 of the first embodiment]
Next, the modification about the point table of 1st Embodiment is demonstrated using FIG. In addition, about the structure similar to 1st Embodiment, a code | symbol is made the same and description is abbreviate | omitted. FIG. 111 is a diagram illustrating an example (Modification 1) of the point table according to the first embodiment.

  The point table (Modification 1) is data including an item “gaming state”, an item “determination value”, and an item “addition point”. The item “gaming state” includes a hold number “0”, a hold number “1” to “4”, a hold number “5”, “6”, and a hold number “ 7 ”and“ 8 ”. It should be noted that the number of holds of the special figure game is a maximum of “8” based on the number of holds based on the first start winning opening (maximum “4”) and the number of holds based on the second starting winning opening (maximum “4”). Is.

  The item “determination value” is a determination value corresponding to the random number for lottery acquired in step D94 (for example, a uniform random number from “0” to “255”). The item “addition point” indicates an addition point corresponding to the item “game state” and the item “determination value”. For example, the point table (Modification 1) shows that in the gaming state corresponding to the number of holds “0”, when the random number for lottery is “0” to “250”, the addition point is “1”. When the random number is “251” to “254”, the addition point is “2”, and when the random number for lottery is “255”, the addition point is “5”. Further, the point table (Modification 1) shows that in the gaming state corresponding to the number of holdings “1” to “4”, the addition point is “1” when the random number for lottery is “0” to “200”. When the lottery random number is “201” to “250”, the addition point is “2”, and when the lottery random number is “251” to “255”, the addition point is “5”. Show. Further, the point table (Modification 1) shows that in the gaming state corresponding to the holding numbers “5” and “6”, the addition point is “1” when the random number for lottery is “0” to “100”. When the lottery random number is “101” to “250”, the addition point is “2”, and when the lottery random number is “251” to “255”, the addition point is “5”. Show. In addition, the point table (Modification 1) shows that in the gaming state corresponding to the holding numbers “7” and “8”, when the random number for lottery is “0” to “255”, the addition point is “5”. Show. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the point game by changing the addition points using the random numbers for lottery even if the number of the reserved numbers is the same.

  Moreover, the point table (modification 1) can vary the size of the expected value of the added points given for each holding number by changing the determination value for each holding number. . Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the point game due to the level of the expected value according to the size of the number of holds. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can give a motivation to continue the game to a player who interrupts the game depending on the size of the number of reserves.

[Modification 2 of the first embodiment]
Next, a modification of the point table of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, about the structure similar to 1st Embodiment, a code | symbol is made the same and description is abbreviate | omitted. FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating an example (Modification 2) of the point table of the first embodiment.

  The point table (Modification 2) is data including an item “gaming state”, an item “determination value”, and an item “addition point”. The item “game state” is divided into a variation time of 20 seconds or less, a variation time of 60 seconds or less, a variation time of more than 60 seconds, and no variation according to the magnitude of the variation display duration of the special game. Note that the magnitude of the variable display duration of the special game is the variable display duration of the currently running variable display game.

  The item “determination value” is a determination value corresponding to the random number for lottery acquired in step D94 (for example, a uniform random number from “0” to “255”). The item “addition point” indicates an addition point corresponding to the item “game state” and the item “determination value”. For example, the point table (Modification 2) indicates that the addition point is “1” when the random number for lottery is “0” to “250” in a gaming state corresponding to a variation time of 20 seconds or less. When the random number is “251” to “254”, the addition point is “2”, and when the random number for lottery is “255”, the addition point is “5”. In addition, the point table (Modification 2) indicates that the addition point is “1” when the random number for lottery is “0” to “200” in the gaming state corresponding to the fluctuation time of 60 seconds or less. When the random number is “201” to “250”, the addition point is “2”, and when the random number for lottery is “251” to “255”, the addition point is “5”. Further, the point table (Modification 2) indicates that the addition point is “1” when the random number for lottery is “0” to “100” in the gaming state corresponding to the variation time of more than 60 seconds. When the random number is “101” to “250”, the addition point is “2”, and when the random number for lottery is “251” to “255”, the addition point is “5”. In addition, the point table (Modification 2) indicates that the addition point is “5” when the random number for lottery is “0” to “255” in the gaming state corresponding to no change. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the point game by making the addition points different by the random numbers for lottery even if the magnitude of the variable display duration time of the special figure game is the same.

  In addition, the point table (Modification 2) is configured such that the expected value of the addition point given for each magnitude of the variable display duration time is changed by changing the determination value for each magnitude of the variable display duration time of the special figure game. The size can be varied. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the point game by the level of the expected value according to the magnitude of the variable display duration. Further, the gaming machine 10 can give a motivation to continue the game to a player who interrupts the game depending on the size of the variable display duration.

[Modification 3 of the first embodiment]
Next, a modified example of privilege options and operation guidance displayed on the display device 41 by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, about the structure similar to 1st Embodiment, a code | symbol is made the same and description is abbreviate | omitted. FIG. 113 is a diagram illustrating an example (Modification 3) of a privilege selection operation screen displayed on the display device of the first embodiment.

  The selection operation display 901 is a display including privilege options and operation guidance that the gaming machine 10 displays on the display device 41. The selection operation display 901 includes a point game related display 920 and a special game game display 929. The point game related display 920 is a display related to the point game, and includes an operation guidance display 924, an option display 925 for a premium effect (point game privilege), and a point cumulative value related display 921.

  The operation guidance display 924 is a display that guides the player through the visual information such as characters, pictures, icons, and the like regarding the operation method related to the point game privilege provision. In addition, the operation guidance display 924 clearly indicates the option setting unit (selection button switch 25a and determination button switch 25b) 25 as the operation guidance display 924a and guides the operation method.

  The option display 925 displays options that can be selected as a privilege of the point game. For example, the option display 925 displays the sound effect A, the sound effect B, and the sound effect C as sound effect options, and displays the point accumulated value necessary for exchanging each option as the exchange point display 926. The option display 925 is an explicit display that clearly indicates the option that is being selected based on the operation input of the selection button switch 25a or the option that is determined based on the operation input of the determination button switch 25b. Explicit display) 927 is displayed. At this time, the option display 925 clearly indicates that an option that cannot be selected cannot be selected.

  The point cumulative value related display 921 includes a pre-replacement point cumulative value display 922 that displays the point cumulative value before the bonus exchange, and a post-replacement point cumulative value display 923 that displays the point cumulative value after the bonus exchange. The special figure game display 929 is a display including at least a part of the display content related to the game state of the special figure game displayed on the display device 41 before the selection operation display 901 is displayed.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the arrangement positions of the point gate and the point indicator and the configuration of the game board surface. FIG. 114 is a front view showing an example of the game board according to the second embodiment. In addition, about the structure similar to 1st Embodiment, a code | symbol is made the same and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game production component) 40 having a display device (variable display device) 41 is arranged at substantially the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so that the game ball does not easily jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT. In an area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information relating to a game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the presentation effect is displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, on the display screen, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed.

  In addition, the left and right portions of the center case 40 are provided with a board effect device 44 that produces an effect of a game by operating. The board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

  On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (common figure start gate) 34 for providing a start condition for the normal figure change display game is provided. A game ball won in the usual start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

  In the gaming area 32, two general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40, and one general winning prize is on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the normal start gate 34. A mouth 35 is arranged. The game balls that have won the general prize opening 35 are detected by a prize opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

  Also, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a start winning opening 360 (first start winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition for the special figure variation display game. A game ball won in the start winning opening 360 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Also, an ordinary variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) for providing a start condition of the special figure variation display game is provided immediately below the starting winning opening 360.
The normal variation winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by opening in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the near side. A closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which a game ball cannot flow is maintained. When the result of the normal variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, a game ball is likely to flow into the normal variation winning device 37 by a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a drive device. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). A game ball won in the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).

Further, an out-out port 30 a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize-winning port or the like is provided below the normal variation winning device 37.
Further, in the game area 32, below the center case 40 and on the right side of the start winning opening 360, a special change that can be converted into a state in which a game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure change display game. A winning device (large winning opening) 38 is provided.

  The special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type open / close door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the near side, depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. It changes from the closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which the big prize opening is closed to the open state (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c driven by a large winning port solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, for example, in a special gaming state or in a small hit game. During the state, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of game balls into the big prize opening by converting the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state, and to give a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player It has become. The game balls that have won the special variable winning device 38 are detected by the big winning opening switch 38a (see FIG. 3).

  The center case 40 has a warp port 39a on the left side. The game balls that have flowed into the warp flow path from the warp opening (warp inlet) 39a roll on the stage in the center case 40, and a part thereof is guided to the warp outlet 39b. The warp outlet 39b is located immediately above the start opening sorting device 36, and the game balls guided to the warp exit 39b can easily win the start opening sorting apparatus 36.

  Further, a point gate 481 and a point indicator 491 are arranged on the lower left side of the start winning opening 360 in the game area 32. By providing the point gate 481 in the vicinity of the start winning opening 360, the gaming machine 10 can cause the player to observe the occurrence timing of the winning at the starting winning opening 360 and the occurrence timing of the point gate 481 at the same time. it can. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can provide the player with the interest of the game by winning the point gate 481 even when the winning to the start winning opening 360 is sparse. The interest of the game by winning such a point gate 481 is to contribute to the reduction of the player's feeling of loss and discomfort due to the lack of winning at the start winning opening 360, and to continue playing the game for the player. Can be motivated.

  In addition, the point gate 481 is provided at a position where there is no chance to win a winning prize opening 360. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can increase the winning opportunity of the point gate 481. Further, the point gate 481 is provided at a position where there is a chance to win the normal variation winning device 37. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both a chance to win the regular variable prize device 37 and a chance to win the point gate 481. A game ball won in the point gate 481 is detected by the point switch 48a (see FIG. 4). The point indicator 491 is composed of two 7-segment LEDs, and displays a cumulative value of the number of points given in response to winning detection (passage detection) of the point gate 481 in two digits. The accumulated value of the number of points is exchanged for a privilege at a predetermined opportunity and given to the player. The privilege given according to the accumulated value of the number of points includes, for example, an increase in choices of production modes. The player can select a desired effect mode by operating the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, of the game areas 32 where the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. It is said that. Then, the player can aim to win the start winning opening 360 by adjusting the firing force and firing the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed), and fire the game ball to the right game area (so-called By right-handing), it is possible to aim to win the normal start gate 34, the normal variation winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 38.

  Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is disposed at a position corresponding to the right game area, and the right game area is reached. The game balls thus fired are configured to pass through a flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. The material of at least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is a material that allows a game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visually recognized from the outside. A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be viewed through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42. .

  Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the general figure start gate 34, which form the special figure fluctuation display game, are provided. There is provided a collective display device 50 for displaying a game of variable display with a win as a trigger and displaying various information.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the arrangement positions of the point gate and the point indicator. FIG. 115 is a front view showing an example of a game board according to the third embodiment. In addition, about the structure similar to 1st Embodiment, a code | symbol is made the same and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the game board 3002, a point gate 482 and a point display 492 are disposed below the warp port 39a in the game area 32. By providing the point gate 482 in the vicinity of the warp port 39a, the gaming machine 10 causes the player to simultaneously observe the inflow timing of the game ball to the warp port 39a and the occurrence timing of the winning to the point gate 482. be able to. Further, the gaming machine 10 can increase the value of points by reducing the winning frequency to the point gate 482 due to the inflow of gaming balls to the warp port 39a. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can provide the player with the fun of playing the game by winning the point gate 482 even when the inflow of game balls to the warp port 39a is sparse. The interest of the game by winning to such a point gate 482 contributes to the reduction of the player's feeling of loss and discomfort due to the sparse flow of game balls to the warp port 39a, and continues to the player. Motivation to play games can be given.

  The point gate 482 is provided at a position where there is a chance to win a prize to the normal variation winning device 37, the general winning port 35, and the start port distributing device 36. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both a chance to win the normal variation winning device 37, the general winning port 35, and the start port allocating device 36 and a chance to win the point gate 482.

  Further, since the point indicator 492 is located below the point gate 482, it is located in the field of view of the player who follows the game ball that has won the point gate 482. Thereby, even if the point gate 482 and the point indicator 492 are separate bodies, the gaming machine 10 can feel that the point gate 482 and the point indicator 492 are related to each other. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 not only provides a game that is easy to understand for the player, but is also freed from the restriction that the point gate 482 and the point indicator 492 are arranged together, thereby improving the degree of freedom of design and contributing to cost reduction. To do.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is different from the first embodiment and the third embodiment in the arrangement positions of the point gate and the point indicator. FIG. 116 is a front view showing an example of the game board according to the fourth embodiment. In addition, about the structure similar to 1st Embodiment, a code | symbol is made the same and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The game board 3003 is provided with a warp port 39 a on the left side of the center case 40. The game balls that have flowed into the warp flow path from the warp opening (warp inlet) 39a roll on the stage in the center case 40, and a part thereof is guided to the warp outlet 39b. The warp outlet 39b is located immediately above the start opening sorting device 36, and the game balls guided to the warp exit 39b can easily win the start opening sorting apparatus 36.

  In the game board 3003, a point gate 483 is disposed in the flow path from the warp port 39a to the warp outlet 39b. For example, the point gate 483 is provided directly below the warp port 39a. In the point gate 483, the point switch 48a may be a gate type sensor or a flat type sensor. For example, when the point switch 48a is a flat type sensor, the gaming machine 10 can be provided on the rolling surface on the stage in the center case 40 by using the point switch 48a as a flat type sensor. In this case, the gaming machine 10 may detect a game ball that rolls on the stage two or more times, and can provide the player with a sense of expectation that the number of points given increases as the number of rolls increases. .

  In addition, by providing the point gate 483 in the warp passage, the gaming machine 10 plays a game with a sense of expectation of winning of the game ball to the start opening distributing device 36 and occurrence of the point gate 483 for one game ball. Can be provided. In addition, since the gaming machine 10 uses the inflow of game balls to the warp port 39a as a winning condition for the point gate 483, the winning frequency for the point gate 483 can be reduced and the value of points can be increased.

  Note that the point gate 483 is provided at a position where there is a chance to win the normal variation winning device 37, the general winning port 35, and the start port distributing device 36. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both a chance to win the normal variation winning device 37, the general winning mouth 35, and the start mouth allocating device 36 and a winning opportunity of the point gate 483.

  In addition, since the point indicator 493 is located away from the point gate 483, it is difficult to enter the player's field of view following the game ball that has won the point gate 483. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can prompt the player to look over the entire game board 3003. Therefore, the player can get an opportunity to look around the entire game board 3003 and can feel the effect that has been missed in the past.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is different from the first embodiment, the third embodiment, and the fourth embodiment in the arrangement positions of the point gate and the point indicator. FIG. 117 is a front view showing an example of a game board according to the fifth embodiment. In addition, about the structure similar to 1st Embodiment, a code | symbol is made the same and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The game board 3004 is provided with a special variable winning device (large winning opening) 38 on the left side of the center case 40, and a point gate 484 and a point indicator 494 are provided at the lower left of the special variable winning device 38. . For example, the point gate 484 is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning device 38 and at a position where a game ball that has missed the chance to win the special variable winning device 38 can be won. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can make the player pay attention to the game ball that missed the winning opportunity to the special variable winning device 38. Such a gaming machine 10 contributes to reducing a player's feeling of loss and discomfort with respect to a game ball that misses the opportunity to win the special variable winning device 38, and motivates the player to continue playing the game. Can be given.

  In addition, since the point display 494 is located immediately below the point gate 484, the gaming machine 10 can easily give the player the winning of the game ball to the point gate 484 and the update of the accumulated point value accompanying the winning. It can be confirmed.

[Sixth Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment is different from the first embodiment and the third to fifth embodiments in the arrangement positions of the point gate and the point indicator. FIG. 118 is a front view showing an example of the game board according to the sixth embodiment. In addition, about the structure similar to 1st Embodiment, a code | symbol is made the same and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The game board 3005 is provided with a general start gate 34 on the left side of the center case 40, and a point gate 485 is provided on the lower left side of the general start gate 34. For example, the point gate 485 is in the vicinity of the usual start gate 34. Usually, the normal start gate 34 is in an area where game balls flow down densely, and the gaming machine 10 is provided with a point gate 485 in the vicinity of the general start gate 34 so that the chance to win the point gate 485 increases. Can be expected.

Thereby, in addition to the variable display game which also displays the display apparatus 41, the game machine 10 can obtain the interest by a point game.
In addition, since the point indicator 495 is located away from the point gate 485, it is difficult to enter the player's field of view following the game ball that has won the point gate 485. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can prompt the player to look over the entire game board 3005. Therefore, the player can have an opportunity to look around the entire game board 3005 and can feel the effect that has been missed.

[Seventh Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the point accumulated value is updated and the privilege is given based on the progress of the variable display game for the point game. First, the display during change display and the display on the point display 49 in the display device 41 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 122. FIG. 119 is a diagram (No. 1) illustrating a display example of a variable display screen and a point display displayed on the display device of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 120 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a display example of a variable display screen displayed on the display device of the seventh embodiment and a point display. FIG. 121 is a diagram (part 3) illustrating a display example of a variable display screen displayed on the display device of the seventh embodiment and a point display. FIG. 122 is a diagram (part 4) illustrating a display example of a variable display screen displayed on the display device of the seventh embodiment and a point display.

  A variable display in-progress screen 9301 shown in FIG. 119 (1 a) shows the variable display in-progress screen on the display device 41. The variable display in-progress screen 9301 includes a special figure game display 930, a hold-up display 931, and a hold-up display 932 as display contents. The special game game display 930 corresponds to the special game game display area in the display area. The special figure game display 930 displays the variable display state of the special figure game using the decorative symbols 930L, 930C, and 930R. The variation display in-progress screen 9301 indicates that the decorative symbols 930L, 930C, and 930R are changing, and indicates that the corresponding special figure game is in the change display state.

  The hold display 932 corresponds to a hold area in the display area. The hold display 932 clearly indicates the number of hold memories of the special figure variation display game and displays the hold memory display mode for each hold memory. For example, when the reserved memory number of the special figure variation display game is “6”, the hold display 932 displays six hold memories 932a, 932b, 932c, 932d, 932e, and 932f. Further, the hold display 932 differs from the display mode of the hold memories 932a, 932b, 932c, 932d, 932e, and 932f by changing the display mode of the hold memory 932c and the hold memory 932e (hold memory display mode). The degree of expectation for the game result is notified.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can notify in advance the degree of expectation corresponding to the special figure variation display game scheduled to be variation displayed.
The reserved digest display 931 corresponds to the reserved digest area in the display area. The on-hold digest display 931 displays the on-hold storage 931a at the time of the on-hold storage corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game being displayed in a variable manner. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate the expected degree notified in advance about the reserved memory corresponding to the special figure variable display game during the variable display by the reserved memory 931a even during the variable display.

  A point cumulative value display 4911 shown in FIG. 119 (1 b) shows the two-digit 7-segment LEDs 49 a and 49 b of the point display 49 when the display device 41 displays the variable display screen 9301. The point accumulation value display 4911 indicates that the point accumulation value is “2”.

  A variable display in-progress screen 9302 shown in FIG. 119 (2a) is a display screen after the variable display in-progress screen 9301 in the display device 41, and shows the variable display in-progress display screen during reach. The variation display in-progress screen 9302 indicates that the decoration symbol 930L, 930R is a temporary stop displaying “6” in the special symbol game display 930, and that the ornament symbol 930C is changing. The variable display in-progress screen 9302 indicates a reach state in which the decorative symbols 930L, 930C, and 930R wait for a stop at “6” in the special figure game display 930.

  A point accumulated value display 4912 shown in FIG. 119 (2 b) shows the two-digit 7-segment LEDs 49 a and 49 b of the point display 49 when the display device 41 displays the variable display in-progress screen 9302. The point accumulated value display 4912 indicates that the point accumulated value is “2”.

  120 (3a) is a display screen after the variable display screen 9302 in the display device 41, and shows the variable display screen during reach. The variable display in-progress screen 9303 includes a special figure game display 929, a hold-up display 931, a hold-up display 932, and an effect display 933 as display contents. The variable display in-progress screen 9303 displays a special figure game display 929 instead of the special figure game display 930. The special figure game display 929 is a display area smaller than the special figure game display 930, and displays part or all of the information displayed by the special figure game display 930. Further, the special figure game display 929 is located at a corner of the display area.

  The effect display 933 corresponds to the effect area in the display area. The effect display 933 is located in the center of the display area in place of the special figure game display 930. The effect display 933 displays an effect corresponding to the special figure variation display game during the variation display. The effect display 933 displays characters 933a and 933b, for example, and displays an effect in which the character 933a and the character 933b confront each other.

  A point accumulated value display 4913 shown in FIG. 120 (3b) shows the two-digit 7-segment LEDs 49a and 49b of the point display 49 that is displaying the fluctuation display screen 9303 on the display device 41. The point accumulation value display 4913 indicates that the point accumulation value is “2”.

  120 (4a) is a display screen after the variable display screen 9303 in the display device 41, and shows the variable display screen at the time of temporary stop. The variable display in-progress screen 9304 includes a special figure game display 929, a hold-up display 931, a hold-up display 932, and an effect display 933 as display contents. The special symbol game display 929 indicates that the decorative symbols 929L and 929R are temporarily stopped displaying “6”, and the decorative symbol 929C is temporarily stopped displaying “7”.

  The effect display 933 displays, for example, characters 933a and 933b and a message “YOU LOSE...”, And displays an effect that the character 933a has lost the confrontation with the character 933b, that is, a result unfavorable for the player.

  A point accumulated value display 4914 shown in FIG. 120 (4b) shows the two-digit 7-segment LEDs 49a and 49b of the point display 49 on which the display device 41 is displaying the fluctuation display screen 9304. The point accumulated value display 4914 indicates that the point accumulated value is “2”.

  121 (5a) is a display screen after the variable display screen 9304 in the display device 41, and shows the variable display screen at the time of temporary stop. The variable display in-progress screen 9305 includes a special game display 930, a hold-up display 931, and a hold-up display 932 in the display content. The variable display in-progress screen 9305 displays a special game game display 930 instead of the special game game display 929. The special figure game game display 930 indicates that the decorative symbols 930L and 930R are temporarily stopped displaying “6”, and the decorative symbol 930C indicates that they are temporarily stopped displaying “7”.

  A point accumulated value display 4915 shown in FIG. 121 (5b) shows the two-digit 7-segment LEDs 49a and 49b of the point display 49 on which the display device 41 is displaying the fluctuation display screen 9305. The point accumulated value display 4915 indicates that the point accumulated value is “2”.

  121 (6a) is a display screen for variation display 9306, which is a display screen after the variation display screen 9305 in the display device 41, and shows a variation display screen during re-variation. The variable display in-progress screen 9306 includes a special figure game game display 930, a hold-up display 931, and a hold-up display 932 in the display contents. The variable display in-progress screen 9306 indicates that the decorative symbol 930L, 930R is “6” in the special symbol game display 930, and the special symbol “G” is displayed after the decorative symbol 930C is changed again. Indicates a temporary stop. The special symbol is a special symbol that does not appear during normal fluctuation display. The special symbol will be described later with reference to FIG. The state in which the decorative symbol 930C displays the special symbol “G” on the special game display 930 is a state in which a predetermined added value is added and the point cumulative value is updated in the point game. This is the state that triggers the update to the maximum value.

  A point cumulative value display 4916 shown in FIG. 121 (6b) shows the two-digit 7-segment LEDs 49a and 49b of the point display 49 on which the display device 41 is displaying the fluctuation display screen 9306. The point accumulation value display 4916 indicates that the point accumulation value is “99”. That is, the point accumulated value display 4916 indicates that the point accumulated value has been updated to the maximum value as the decorative symbol 930C displays the special symbol “G”.

  That is, the state in which the decorative symbol 930C displays the special symbol “G” in the special symbol game display 930 is a state in which the display contents of the two-digit 7-segment LEDs 49a and 49b of the point indicator 49 are updated. Therefore, the special symbol “G” displayed by the display device 41 corresponds to one form of the point accumulation value update trigger notification function by the gaming machine 10. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can guide the player to update the point accumulated value and suppress loss of the opportunity for the player to gain interest from the point game.

  122 (7a) is a display screen after change display 9306 on the display device 41, and is a display screen during change display during temporary stop. The variable display in-progress screen 9307 includes a special figure game display 929, a hold-up display 931, a hold-up display 932, and an effect display 933 as display contents. The variable display in-progress screen 9307 displays a special figure game game display 929 instead of the special figure game game display 930. The variable display in-progress screen 9307 indicates that the decoration symbol 929L, 929R is “6” on the special game display 929, and the special symbol “G” is displayed after the decoration symbol 929C has been changed again. Indicates a temporary stop.

  The variation display screen 9307 includes a gacha display 934 and an operation guidance display 9241 in the effect display 933. The gacha display 934 is a lottery effect display using a so-called gacha (lotter). The gacha display 934 provides a gacha game as a point game privilege to be given to the player. Gacha game is a form of privilege in a format that can be directly felt by the player, such as video output and audio output. The gacha display 934 includes a lottery ball indication unit 9341, a lottery operation display unit 9342, and a lottery ball exit display unit 9343. The lottery ball specifying unit 9341 clearly indicates the lottery balls (934a, 934b, 934c,...) To be a lottery object, and guides the player about the lottery probability and possible lottery results. For example, when the lottery ball specifying unit 9341 specifies 10 lottery balls (934a, 934b, 934c,...), The lottery ball specifying unit 9341 suggests that the lottery probability of a specific lottery ball is 1/10. To do. In addition, the lottery ball clarification unit 9341 suggests that the size of the expected value differs depending on the display mode (for example, color, size, shape, etc.) of the lottery ball 934a, the lottery ball 934b, and the lottery ball 934c. The lottery operation display unit 9342 displays a rotatable operation knob. The lottery ball exit display unit 9343 displays the exit of the lottery ball 934z obtained as the lottery result.

  The operation guidance display 9241 is a display that guides the player with visual information such as characters, pictures, icons, etc., regarding an operation (gacha operation) method related to the point game privilege grant. Further, the operation guidance display 9241 guides the operation method by specifying the option setting unit (selection button switch 25a and decision button switch 25b) 25 as the operation guidance display 924a. For example, in a gacha operation, the selection button switch 25a accepts a lottery ball agitation operation specified by the lottery ball indication unit 9341, and the decision button switch 25b accepts a lottery ball take-out operation specified by the lottery ball indication unit 9341. The effect display 933 receives the input of the selection button switch 25a and displays the effect of stirring the lottery ball specified by the lottery ball specifying unit 9341, receives the input of the decision button switch 25b, and operates the operation knob on the lottery operation display unit 9342. The effect display which rotates is performed and the effect display which takes out the lottery ball | bowl 934z obtained as a lottery result from the lottery ball exit display part 9343 is performed.

  Note that the lottery ball display mode specified by the lottery ball specifying unit 9341 may be associated with the hold memory displayed by the hold display 932. In this case, the number of lottery balls and the display mode specified by the lottery ball specifying unit 9341 can be determined based on the number and display mode of the hold memory displayed by the hold display 932. In addition, the number of lotteries displayed in the gacha display 934 is not limited to one and may be two or more. In that case, the size of the number of lotteries may be associated with the hold storage displayed by the hold display 932. According to this, the gaming machine 10 can give the player the motivation to increase the reserved memory number. Such a gaming machine 10 can be expected to improve operation.

  In addition, the lottery ball display mode specified by the lottery ball specifying unit 9341 may be associated with the size of the accumulated point value before the maximum value is updated. According to this, the gaming machine 10 does not obtain the same result when the point accumulated value close to the maximum value is updated to the maximum value and when the point accumulated value far from the maximum value is updated to the maximum value. You can relax your sense of fairness. Such a gaming machine 10 can be expected to improve operation.

  A point accumulated value display 4917 shown in FIG. 122 (7b) shows the two-digit 7-segment LEDs 49a and 49b of the point display 49 on which the display device 41 is displaying the variable display in-progress screen 9307. The point accumulation value display 4917 indicates that the point accumulation value is “0”. That is, the point accumulated value display 4917 indicates that the point accumulated value has been reset with the start timing of the effect relating to the point game benefit grant as the point accumulated value reset opportunity.

  122 (8a) is a display screen after the variable display screen 9307 in the display device 41, and shows the variable display screen during temporary stop. The variable display in-progress screen 9308 includes a special figure game display 929, a hold-up display 931, a hold-up display 932, and an effect display 933 as display contents. The variable display in-progress screen 9307 displays a special figure game game display 929 instead of the special figure game game display 930. The variable display in-progress screen 9307 indicates that the decoration symbol 929L, 929R is “6” on the special game display 929, and the special symbol “G” is displayed after the decoration symbol 929C has been changed again. Indicates a temporary stop.

  The variable display in-progress screen 9308 notifies the final lottery result using the lottery ball 934z obtained as the lottery result as the effect display 933. That is, the variable display in-progress screen 9307 corresponds to expectation notification, and the variable display in-progress screen 9307 corresponds to result notification. For example, the variable display screen 9308 includes a result notification display 935 in the display contents of the effect display 933. In addition to the big hit, the result notification display 935 may indicate a small hit, latent probability change, non-latent probability change, time reduction, loss, or the like. Thereafter, the variable display in-progress screen 9308 performs a display for confirming the result of the special figure game (not shown).

  A point accumulated value display 4918 shown in FIG. 122 (8b) shows the two-digit 7-segment LEDs 49a and 49b of the point display 49 on which the display device 41 is displaying the fluctuation display screen 9308. The point accumulation value display 4918 indicates that the point accumulation value is “0”.

Next, the special symbol of 7th Embodiment is demonstrated using FIG. FIG. 123 is a diagram illustrating an example of a special symbol display mode according to the seventh embodiment.
The special symbol is a symbol that can be used to notify the degree of expectation for the game result according to the display mode, and is distinguished from a normal decorative symbol. The special symbol does not appear in the normal variation display, but appears in a specific case and has a role of notifying the player of the expected degree of the game result. For example, the gaming machine 10 has four types of special symbols, and the first special symbol is represented by overlapping the symbol “G” against a balloon having a saw-toothed outer shape, and the jackpot is targeted for notification. . The second special symbol is represented by superimposing the symbol “G” against the background of the hexagonal shape, and the small hit is a notification target. The third special symbol is represented by superimposing the symbol “G” on the background of a circular outer shape, and the latent probability change is a notification target. The fourth special symbol is represented by only the symbol “G” without a background, and the loss is targeted for notification.

  In addition, each special symbol does not necessarily have to notify the corresponding notification target as a definite result (for example, 100% jackpot), but notifies the corresponding notification target as a probabilistic probability (for example, 50% jackpot). ). In addition, each special symbol does not necessarily correspond to one notification target (for example, only a big hit), and may correspond to two or more notification targets (for example, a big hit and a small hit).

  Moreover, the notification target corresponding to each special symbol may not be fixed, and the notification target may be changed depending on conditions. For example, one of the special symbols usually corresponds to a loss, but may correspond to a big hit by applying an image effect. The image effect is to change the display mode of the special symbol at the normal time, and includes, for example, color change, size change, deformation, and the like.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 has a notification function regarding the variable display game according to the display mode of the special symbols, and also has a notification function regarding the gacha game as described with reference to FIG. In other words, the gaming machine 10 has a notification function relating to a game accompanied by a game value assignment and a notification function relating to a game not accompanied by a game value assignment, depending on the display mode of special symbols. Furthermore, in other words, the gaming machine 10 has a notification function related to a game managed by the game control device 100 and a notification function related to a game managed by the effect control device 300 according to the display mode of the special symbol.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can notify the two games by the display mode of the special symbol, and can increase the player's interest in the special symbol and improve the notification function.

Next, point control processing and point exchange processing according to the seventh embodiment will be described.
[Point control processing]
First, the point control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a view illustrating a flowchart of point control processing in the effect control device of the seventh embodiment. The point control process is a process executed by the control unit in step D31 of the main process. The point control processing of the seventh embodiment is common to the point control processing of the first embodiment and the processing from step D71 to step D73, and is different in the processing after step D74.

[Step D71] The control unit executes a point initialization process.
[Step D72] The control unit executes point update processing.
[Step D73] The control unit executes point exchange processing.

  [Step D74] The control unit executes a second point exchange process. The second point exchanging process is a process of exchanging the accumulated value of the number of points for a gacha game (privilege given to the player) at a predetermined opportunity. The second point exchange process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  [Step D75] The control unit determines whether or not the point update timer has expired. The point update timer is a timer used to determine the timing for updating the accumulated point value to the maximum value, and the timer value is set in the second point exchange process. The control unit proceeds to step D76 when the point update timer expires, and proceeds to step D77 when the time has not expired.

[Step D76] The control unit updates the point accumulated value to the maximum value.
[Step D77] The control unit determines whether or not the point reset timer has expired. The point reset timer is a timer used to determine the timing for resetting the accumulated point value, and the timer value is set in the second point exchange process. The control unit proceeds to step D78 when the point reset timer is up, and ends the point control process when the time is not up.

[Step D78] The control unit resets the accumulated point value and ends the point control process.
[Second point exchange process]
Next, the second point exchange process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 is a view illustrating a flowchart of second point exchange processing in the effect control device of the seventh embodiment. The second point exchange process is a process executed by the control unit in step D74 of the point control process. The second point exchange process is a process for exchanging the accumulated point value for a gacha game.

  [Step D111] The control unit detects the start of fluctuation of the special figure variation display game, and determines whether or not the detected special figure fluctuation display game corresponds to the gacha game. For example, the control unit can determine whether or not the special figure variation display game corresponds to the gacha game based on the type of command received by the effect control device 300 from the game control device 100. Whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game corresponds to the gacha game is determined based on the type of command, the result derived by the special figure fluctuation display game, the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game (for example, the gacha game Sufficient variation time to perform) can be used.

The control unit proceeds to step D112 when the special figure variation display game corresponds to the gacha game, and ends the second point exchange process when it does not correspond to the gacha game.
[Step D112] The control unit acquires a gacha game variation change condition. The gacha game variation change condition is a condition for changing the special figure variation display game that has detected the start of variation to gacha game variation. For example, the gacha game variation changing condition is a determination value when a random number lottery is performed. It should be noted that the gacha game variation changing condition may define a gaming state and a range of accumulated point values that allow the special figure variation display game to be changed to a gacha game.

[Step D113] The control unit obtains a random number.
[Step D114] The control unit determines whether or not to change the gacha game variation based on the gacha game variation change condition and the random number. A control part progresses to step D115, when performing a gacha game variation change, and complete | finishes a 2nd point exchange process, when not performing a gacha game variation change.

  [Step D115] The control unit changes the special display variation display game effect display to gacha game variation. The gacha game variation is an effect display including the gacha game. For example, the control unit can change the effect display of the special figure variation display game to gacha game variation by replacing the content edited in the effect display editing process in step D23 of the main process. Further, the control unit may discard the contents edited in the effect display editing process in step D23 of the main process, and perform re-editing in the effect display editing process.

  [Step D116] The control unit sets a point update timer. The timer value of the point update timer is determined in accordance with the timing of the gacha game played in the special figure variation display game. Note that the timer value of the point update timer may be set in advance according to the type of command.

  [Step D117] The control unit sets a point reset timer. The timer value of the point reset timer is determined according to the timing of the gacha game played in the special figure variation display game. Note that the timer value of the point reset timer may be set in advance according to the type of command. After setting the point reset timer, the control unit ends the second point exchange process.

The gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a point gate 48 and a point display 49 on the front side. The point gate 48 includes a point switch 48a, and the point switch 48a detects a game ball that has won (including passing) the point gate 48. The gaming machine 10 determines a predetermined number of points triggered by winning detection of the point gate 48 (detection of game media including passage detection). The gaming machine 10 calculates a point accumulation value obtained by accumulating the determined number of points over a predetermined period (including a period in a predetermined state). The point display 49 displays the point accumulated value. The gaming machine 10 exchanges a point accumulated value of a predetermined size for a privilege. The privilege to be exchanged is an effect aspect that can be presented by the effect control device 300. Moreover, the privilege to be exchanged is an effect aspect that does not involve the game control device 100.

(2) The gaming machine 10 changes the effect mode of the variable display game as a privilege.
(3) The gaming machine 10 has second point accumulated value update means that does not depend on winning in the point gate 48, and is displaying the accumulated point value based on a predetermined attribute of the varying display game. The point accumulated value is updated and the point accumulated value is exchanged for a privilege.

(4) The predetermined attribute of the variation display game is a command type corresponding to the variation display game or a variation time of the variation display game as a result of the variation display game being derived.
(5) The gaming machine 10 includes a first control unit (for example, the game control device 100), a second control unit (for example, the effect control device 300), and a display control unit (for example, the effect control device 300). The first control unit determines the number of points in response to detection of the game medium in the first detector (for example, the point gate 48), and the accumulated value of the number of points for a predetermined period is displayed on the point display (for example, the point display 49). A first game (for example, gacha) that can be displayed and exchanged with the accumulated value when the accumulated value satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, an effect mode that can be presented by the effect control device 300) to the player. Control). The second control unit can give the player a second privilege (for example, a big hit in a special game) based on the detection of the game medium in the second detector (for example, the first start winning port or the second starting winning port). A second game (for example, a special game) is controlled. In the display device (for example, display device 41), the display control unit performs a first display state (for example, during variable display screen 9305) that performs variable display regarding the second game using the first identification information (for example, decorative symbols 930L, 930C, and 930R). ), And a second display state (for example, a variable display in-progress screen 9306) for performing variable display regarding the first game and the second game based on the first identification information and the second identification information (for example, the special symbol “G”). Switching control is possible.

(6) The second display state is a state that triggers the update of the accumulated point value by adding a predetermined added value.
(7) The second display state is a state that triggers the update of the accumulated point value to the maximum value.

(8) The second display state is a state that triggers updating of the display content of the point indicator.
[Eighth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 139. The gaming machine shown in the eighth embodiment executes unclear control that makes the end of the probability variation duration unclear. First, the gaming state relating to the special figure game of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is an example of a state transition diagram of the gaming state relating to the special figure game of the eighth embodiment.

  The gaming state of the special figure game includes a low probability state ST1, a big hit state ST2, a first high probability state ST3, and a second high probability state ST4. The low probability state ST1 is a state (for example, about 1/200) in which the jackpot probability of the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game is low. The big hit state ST2 is a big hit state in the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game. The first high probability state ST3 is a state where the jackpot probability of the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game is high (for example, about 1/50), and is a state where there is a general power support. The second high probability state ST4 is a state where the jackpot probability of the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game is high (for example, about 1/50), and is a state where there is no general power support.

  The general electric power support is a state where the normally variable winning device 37 is in a short time state, supports the start winning of the special figure 2 game, increases the number of prize ball payout opportunities, and allows the player to proceed advantageously. Therefore, the first high probability state ST3 is a gaming state in which the player can advantageously advance the game compared to the second high probability state ST4.

  The low-probability state ST1 transitions to the big hit state ST2 with the occurrence of the big hit in the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game as a state transition condition. The jackpot state ST2 transitions to the first high-probability state ST3 using the jackpot end as a state transition condition. The first high probability state ST3 transitions to the big hit state ST2 with the occurrence of the big hit in the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game as a state transition condition. In addition, the first high probability state ST3 is the second high probability with the state transition condition being the end of the change of the specified number of times in the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game (for example, the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game are combined 50 times). State transition is made to the probability state ST4. The second high probability state ST4 transitions to the big hit state ST2 with the occurrence of the big hit in the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game as a state transition condition. In addition, the second high probability state ST4 is a low probability state in which the state transition condition is a change end of a specified number of times in the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game (for example, the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game are combined four times). State transition is made to ST1.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 transitions to the first high-probability state ST3 in which the player can advantageously advance the game after the end of the big hit in the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game, and continues to play after the big hit. Give players motivation. Also, the gaming machine 10 eliminates the opportunity to directly transition from the first high probability state ST3 to the low probability state ST1, and transitions from the first high probability state ST3 to the low probability state ST1 via the second high probability state ST4. I am doing so. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 eliminates the opportunity for the player's game continuation motivation to drop significantly. That is, the second high-probability state ST4 functions as a buffer game state that buffers a decrease in the game continuation motivation of the player in the process in which the first high-probability state ST3 transitions to the low-probability state ST1.

  Next, the display state corresponding to the gaming state relating to the special figure game of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is an example of a state transition diagram of a display state corresponding to the gaming state of the eighth embodiment.

  The displays 600, 601, 602, and 603 are display screens displayed by the display device 41, and display contents in the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game. The display 600 is a low-probability display state, and is a display state corresponding to the low-probability state ST1. The display 600 guides the occurrence of a big hit by, for example, a combination of three Chinese numerals. The display 601 is a display state during the big hit, and is a display state corresponding to the big hit state ST2. The display 601 indicates that a big hit is being made by, for example, a big hit display. The display 602 is a high-probability display state and is a display state corresponding to the first high-probability state ST3. The display 602 guides the occurrence of a big hit by, for example, a combination of three Arabic numerals. A display 603 is a special display state, and is a display state corresponding to the second high probability state ST4 and the low probability state ST1. The display 603 guides the occurrence of a big hit by a combination of 12 panel displays arranged in a 3 × 4 matrix, for example.

  That is, the gaming machine 10 can inform the player that the game state of the special figure game is the low probability state ST1 by the display 600. Further, the gaming machine 10 can inform the player that the game state of the special game is the big hit state ST2 by the display 601. Further, the gaming machine 10 can inform the player that the game state of the special figure game is the first high probability state ST3 by the display 602. Further, the gaming machine 10 can inform the player that the game state of the special figure game is the second high probability state ST4 or the low probability state ST1 by the display 603.

  The low-probability display state (display 600) transitions to the big hit display state (display 601) using the occurrence of a big hit in the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game as a state transition condition. The big hit display state (display 601) transitions to the high probability display state (display 602) using the big hit end as a state transition condition. The high probability display state (display 602) transitions to the big hit display state (display 601) with the occurrence of a big hit in the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game as a state transition condition. In addition, the high probability display state (display 602) is specially set with the state transition condition being the end of the change of the specified number of times in the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game (for example, the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game are combined 50 times). State transition is made to the display state (display 603). The special display state (display 603) transitions to the big hit display state (display 601) using the occurrence of a big hit in the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game as a state transition condition. Also, the special display state (display 603) has a low probability with the state transition condition being the end of change of a specified number of times in the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game (for example, the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game are combined 20 times). State transition is made to the display state (display 600).

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 is in the high probability display state (display 602) that it is the first high probability state ST3 in which the player can advantageously advance the game after the big hit in the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game. Guide and give players the motivation to continue playing after the big hit. In addition, the gaming machine 10 guides a predetermined period after the transition to the second high probability state ST4 and the low probability state ST1 by a special display state (display 603), and continues even after the end of the first high probability state ST3. Give players the motivation to play.

  Since the gaming state and the display state corresponding to the gaming state do not necessarily correspond one-to-one, the correspondence between the gaming state and the display state corresponding to the gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing chart showing a correspondence relationship between the gaming state and the display state, with the number of changes in the eighth embodiment as a time axis.

  In the first high probability state ST3, when the first fluctuation of the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game after the big hit ends is set to the first time, unless the big hit occurs in the middle, the 50th time (timing T1) Continue until.

  Therefore, when the gaming state is the first high probability state ST3, the display state is a high probability display state. Further, when the display state is the high probability display state, the gaming state is the first high probability state ST3. That is, the first high probability state ST3 and the high probability display state have a one-to-one correspondence.

  The gaming state transitions to the second high probability state ST4 at timing T1. The display state transitions to the special display state at timing T1. In the second high probability state ST4, when the first fluctuation of the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game in the second high probability state ST4 is set to the first time, the specified number of times is obtained unless a big hit occurs in the middle ( Continue until timing T2).

  The gaming state transitions to the low probability state ST1 at timing T2. Further, the display state continues to be the special display state at the timing T2. The low probability state ST1 continues unless a big hit occurs. On the other hand, in the special display state, when the first fluctuation of the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game in the second high-probability state ST4 is set to the first time, the 20th (timing) Continue until T3).

  Therefore, when the gaming state is the second high probability state ST4, the display state is a special display state. When the gaming state is the low-probability state ST1, the display state from the fifth to the twenty-first variation after the second high-probability state ST4 transition (timing T1), that is, the first to sixteen variations after the low-probability state ST1 transition. The display state up to the first time is a special display state. When the gaming state is the low probability state ST1, the display state after the 21st change number after the second high probability state ST4 transition (timing T1), that is, the display state after the 17th change number after the low probability state ST1 transition is It is a low probability display state. Further, when the display state is the low probability display state, the gaming state is determined to be the low probability state ST1, but when the display state is the special display state, the gaming state is not determined to be one and the low probability state ST1 or the second 2 High probability state ST4. That is, the second high probability state ST4 and the special display state do not have a one-to-one correspondence. Further, the low probability state ST1 and the special display state do not have a one-to-one correspondence.

  In the first high probability state ST3, the special figure game probability state has a high probability (that is, a gaming state advantageous to the player in the first index), and there is a general electric power support (that is, a game in the second index). A gaming state advantageous to the player). In the second high probability state ST4, the special figure game probability state has a high probability (that is, a gaming state advantageous to the player in the first index), and there is no general power support (that is, a game in the second index). A gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player). In the low probability state ST1, the special figure game probability state has a low probability (that is, a gaming state that is disadvantageous for the player in the first index), and there is no general power support (that is, for the player in the second index). Unfavorable gaming state) A gaming state.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 is in the second high probability state ST4 in which the player's advantage level is moderate in the transition process from the first high probability state ST3 advantageous to the player to the low probability state ST1 disadvantageous to the player. Intervene. Further, since the special display state corresponding to the second high probability state ST4 also corresponds to the low probability state ST1, the gaming machine 10 changes the state transition from the second high probability state ST4 to the low probability state ST1. Can be ambiguous. Such a gaming machine 10 can improve the sustainability of an opportunity for a player to gain interest.

  The first index is an index that cannot be directly felt by the player while the game is in progress, and the second index is an index that can be directly felt by the player while the game is in progress. For example, the special figure game probability state is a control state of the game control device 100 and is an index that the player cannot know unless explicitly indicated. On the other hand, the ordinary electric power support is an index that the player can know from the short-time state of the normal variation winning device 37. Such a gaming machine 10 can make the state transition from the second high probability state ST4 to the low probability state ST1 more ambiguous to the player. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can further improve the sustainability of an opportunity to obtain interest for the player.

[Special display state transition processing]
Next, the special display state transition process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of special display state transition processing according to the eighth embodiment. The special display state transition process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 in the effect display editing process (step D23) of the main process. The special display state transition process is a process for managing the special display state.

  [Step D201] The control unit determines whether or not the display state is a special display state. The control unit proceeds to step D202 when the display state is not in the special display state, and proceeds to step D204 when the display state is in the special display state.

  [Step D202] The control unit determines whether or not the gaming state is a second high probability state. The control unit proceeds to Step D203 when the gaming state is the second high probability state, and ends the special display state transition process when the gaming state is not the second high probability state.

  [Step D203] The control unit performs a special display state start setting. Thereby, the control part can produce | generate a display screen according to the setting of a special table state. The control unit ends the special display state transition process after performing the special display state start setting.

  [Step D204] The control unit determines whether or not the gaming state is a low probability state. The control unit proceeds to step D205 when the gaming state is a low probability state, and ends the special display state transition process when the gaming state is not the low probability state.

  [Step D205] The control unit determines whether or not the variation of the specified number of times has been completed. The control unit proceeds to step D206 when the change of the specified number of times ends, and ends the special display state transition process when the change of the specified number of times has not ended. The specified number of changes is counted as the first change in the first change in the second high probability state, that is, the first change in the special display state. The specified number of times may be a predetermined fixed value (for example, 20 times) or may be selected from a plurality of values (for example, 10, 20, or 30 times) by lottery or the like.

  [Step D206] The control unit performs special display state end setting. Thereby, the control part can complete | finish a special display state and can produce | generate a display screen according to the setting of a low probability display state. The control unit ends the special display state transition process after performing the special display state end setting.

Next, a display screen in the special display state according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen in the special display state according to the eighth embodiment.
The display screen 610 is displayed on the display device 41. The display screen 610 includes a special display state change display unit 611 and a special display state hold display unit 612. The special display state variation display unit 611 performs an effect display related to the derivation of the result of the special figure game. The special display state variation display unit 611 includes a message display 613, a decorative symbol display 614, an out-of-frame background display 615, and a matrix display unit 616. A message display 613 displays a description of the special display state. For example, the message display 613 displays information such as “a big hit when all four characters are aligned”. The decorative symbol display 614 displays a special figure for presentation (decorative symbol which is not the special special symbol) reduced by three digits. The out-of-frame background display 615 displays the background.

  The matrix display unit 616 displays the variation of the symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol for the special effect drawing. The matrix display unit 616 includes a matrix frame display 620, a lattice frame display 621, a panel display 622, and an in-frame background display 623. The matrix frame display 620 is a display serving as a boundary between the matrix display unit 616 and the out-of-frame background display 615. The lattice frame display 621 is a lattice-shaped frame and divides the matrix display unit 616 into 3 rows and 4 columns.

  The panel display 622 is a panel-like symbol display that can be varied within the region divided by the lattice frame display 621. Hereinafter, the region divided by the grid frame display 621 is specified as, for example, the region of 1 row and A column as the region “A1”. The in-frame background display 623 is a background display in the matrix frame display 620 that is displayed as a background while the panel display 622 is rotating. The in-frame background display 623 displays, for example, a moving image of about 20 seconds in a loop.

  The special display state hold display unit 612 includes a hold digest display 617, a hold display 618, and a special display state name display 619. The reserved digest display 617 is a display corresponding to the symbol variation during digestion. The hold display 618 is a display corresponding to the symbol fluctuation in the hold storage. The hold display 618 has a display unit of 8 squares, shows no hold in the blank state, and shows a hold by displaying a predetermined icon. Further, the expected value for the result of the hold can be notified by the icon display mode. Moreover, the display state during stay can be alert | reported by the display mode of an icon. The special display state name display 619 guides the name of the special display state (for example, “special time”) to the player.

  Next, panel variation (symbol variation) displayed on the matrix display unit 616 will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 136. FIG. 131 is a diagram illustrating an example of a panel variation flow according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 132 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 1) of a matrix display screen according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 133 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 2) of the matrix display screen according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 134 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 3) of the matrix display screen according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 135 is a diagram showing an example (part 4) of the matrix display screen according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 136 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 5) of the matrix display screen according to the eighth embodiment.

  [Panel Fluctuation Flow PF1] Fluctuation is started from a state where 12 panel symbols are stopped. The panel variation is performed by rotating the vertical axis passing through the center of the panel, and the panel symbol is switched every time it is rotated 180 °. The panel variation may be one in which the symbols are switched by horizontal axis rotation, turning operation, or the like. A display example during panel fluctuation is shown in a matrix display screen 6000 (FIG. 132 (1)). The matrix display screen 6000 shows a state where the panel is changing. Panel design 6001 shows a state in which the blank design is facing the front. Panel design 6002 shows a state in which the blank design is tilted by vertical axis rotation. A background 6003 of the panel symbol 6002 is a part of the in-frame background display 623. Thus, the in-frame background display 623 can be observed by rotating the panel symbol. Panel design 6004 shows a state in which a panel design dedicated to column A that can be displayed only in row A is facing the front. Panel design 6005 shows a state in which a panel design dedicated to row B that can be displayed only in row B faces the front. Panel design 6006 shows a state in which a C-row dedicated panel design that can be displayed only in row C faces the front. Panel design 6007 shows a state in which a panel design dedicated to row D that can be displayed only in row D is facing the front.

  Thereafter, the twelve panel symbols that have started to change are stopped from the three panel symbols in row A. When three A-row dedicated panel symbols are arranged in row A, row A is established and the flow proceeds to panel fluctuation flow PF2. On the other hand, if there are not three A-row dedicated panel symbols in row A, row A is not established and the flow proceeds to panel fluctuation flow PF11.

  [Panel Fluctuation Flow PF2] When three A column dedicated panel symbols are arranged in the A column, the A column is established, and the three A column dedicated panel symbols are replaced with the A column establishment notification panel. A display example after the display panel has been replaced with the row A establishment notification panel is shown in a matrix display screen 6010 (FIG. 132 (2)). The matrix display screen 6010 displays the A column establishment notification panels 6011, 6012, and 6013 in the A column, and shows a state in which the change is still in progress from the B column to the D column. The A-row establishment notification panels 6011, 6012, and 6013 each display the upper part of the character A, the middle part of the character A, and the lower part of the character A, thereby displaying a single symbol (the whole of the character A). To do.

  Thereafter, the 12 panel symbols that have started to change stop the three panel symbols in the B row following the A row. When three B-row dedicated panel symbols are arranged in row B, row B is established and the flow proceeds to panel fluctuation flow PF3. On the other hand, if there are not three B-row dedicated panel symbols in row B, row B is not established and the flow proceeds to panel fluctuation flow PF10.

  [Panel Fluctuation Flow PF3] When three B row dedicated panel symbols are arranged in the B row, the B row is established, and the three B row dedicated panel symbols are replaced with the B row establishment notification panel. A display example after being replaced with the B row establishment notification panel is shown in a matrix display screen 6020 (FIG. 132 (3)). The matrix display screen 6020 displays the B-column establishment notification panels 6021, 6022, and 6023 in the B-column, and shows a state that is still changing in the C-column and the D-column. The B-row establishment notification panels 6021, 6022, and 6023 each display the upper part of the character B, the middle part of the character B, and the lower part of the character B, thereby displaying a single symbol (the whole of the character B). To do.

  Thereafter, the twelve panel symbols that have started to change stop the three panel symbols in the C row following the B row. When three C-row dedicated panel symbols are arranged in the C row, the C row is established and the process proceeds to the panel fluctuation flow PF4. On the other hand, if there are not three C-row dedicated panel symbols in row C, row C is not established and the flow proceeds to panel fluctuation flow PF9.

  [Panel Fluctuation Flow PF4] When three C-row dedicated panel symbols are arranged in the C row, the C row is established, and the three C row dedicated panel symbols are replaced with the C row establishment notification panel. A display example after being replaced with the C row establishment notification panel is shown in a matrix display screen 6030 (FIG. 132 (4)). The matrix display screen 6030 displays the C column establishment notification panels 6031, 6032, and 6033 in the C column, and shows the state still in the D column. The C-row establishment notification panels 6031, 6032, and 6033 each display the upper part of the character C, the middle part of the character C, and the lower part of the character C, thereby displaying a single symbol (the whole of the character C). To do.

  Thereafter, the twelve panel symbols that have started to change stop the three panel symbols in the D row following the C row. When three D-row dedicated panel symbols are arranged in the D row, the D row is established and the process proceeds to the panel fluctuation flow PF5. On the other hand, if there are not three D-row dedicated panel symbols in row D, row D is not established and the flow proceeds to panel fluctuation flow PF7.

  [Panel Fluctuation Flow PF5] When three D-row dedicated panel symbols are arranged in the D row, the D row is established, and the three D row dedicated panel symbols are replaced with the D row establishment notification panel. A display example after being replaced with the D-row establishment notification panel is shown in a matrix display screen 6040 (FIG. 133 (1)). The matrix display screen 6040 shows a state where the D column establishment notification panels 6041, 6042, and 6043 are displayed in the D column. The D-row establishment notification panels 6041, 6042, and 6043 each display an upper part of the character D, a middle part of the character D, and a lower part of the character D, thereby displaying a single symbol (the entire character D) in three pieces. To do.

  Therefore, the matrix display screen 6040 displays four characters, that is, four sets of column establishment notification panels in the four columns from the A column to the D column, and the message display 613 provides guidance (“the total image of the four characters is If you get all together, you will get a big hit (Panel Fluctuation Flow PF6).

  [Panel Fluctuation Flow PF7] In the D row, the D row is not established unless there are three D row dedicated panel symbols. A display example of D column failure is shown in the matrix display screen 6050 (FIG. 133 (2)). The matrix display screen 6050 displays a blank symbol 6051, a cherry symbol 6052, and a D-row dedicated panel symbol 6053 in the D column, resulting in a deviation (panel fluctuation flow PF8).

[Panel Fluctuation Flow PF9] In the C row, if three C-row dedicated panel symbols are not prepared, the C row is not established, and the flow proceeds to the panel fluctuation flow PF8 (out of line).
[Panel Fluctuation Flow PF10] In the B row, if there are not three B-row dedicated panel symbols, the B row is not established and the process proceeds to the panel fluctuation flow PF8 (out of line).

  [Panel Fluctuation Flow PF11] In the A row, if there are not three A-row dedicated panel symbols, the A row is not established, and the flow proceeds to the panel fluctuation flow PF8 (out of line). However, when all of the 12 panel symbols stop at the blank symbol, the process proceeds to the panel fluctuation flow PF12.

  [Panel Fluctuation Flow PF12] When all twelve panel symbols stop at a blank symbol, all blanks are displayed as shown in the matrix display screen 6060 (FIG. 133 (3)). All-blank is one of the notification modes for reporting the big hit confirmation. After all blanking, the gaming machine 10 is a big hit (panel fluctuation flow PF14) through the formation of four columns (panel fluctuation flow PF13) as shown in the matrix display screen 6040.

  Even if the A row is not established, the B row is not established, the C row is not established, and the D row is not established, a cherry chance rush is entered when the cherry symbols are stopped in 3 or more of the 12 panel symbols. As shown in the matrix display screen 6070 (FIG. 133 (4)), when three or more cherry symbols 6071, 6072, and 6073 are stopped, a cherry chance is entered. The conditions for entering the cherry chance are not limited by the number of cherry symbols to be displayed and the arrangement of the cherry symbols.

  [Panel Fluctuation Flow PF15] The matrix display screen 6080 (FIG. 134 (1)) shows a state when the cherry chance is entered. The matrix display screen 6080 displays the cut-in 6081 clearly indicating the cherry chance in the center portion, and then starts to change the panel symbol again as shown in the matrix display screen 6090 (FIG. 134 (2)).

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the panel fluctuation flow PF16 or the panel fluctuation flow PF17. The panel fluctuation flow PF16 or the panel fluctuation flow PF17 is distributed based on whether or not it is a big hit, the type of big hit (value).

  [Panel Fluctuation Flow PF16] As shown in the matrix display screen 6100 (FIG. 134 (3)), continuous push of the push buttons (selection button switch 25a, determination button switch 25b) is guided by the cut-in 6101. Thereafter, the process proceeds to the panel fluctuation flow PF18 or the panel fluctuation flow PF19 according to the derived result mode.

  [Panel Fluctuation Flow PF17] As shown in the matrix display screen 6110 (FIG. 134 (4)), the push button single stroke (= “one blow”) is guided by the cut-in 6111. Thereafter, the process proceeds to the panel fluctuation flow PF18 or the panel fluctuation flow PF19 according to the derived result mode.

  [Panel Fluctuation Flow PF18] As shown in the matrix display screen 6120 (FIG. 135 (1)), a cherry symbol (deca cherry) is displayed on a large panel having the size of 12 panel symbols. Decacherry is one of notification modes for notifying the big hit confirmation (panel fluctuation flow PF20).

  [Panel Fluctuation Flow PF19] As shown in the matrix display screen 6130 (FIG. 135 (2)), the failure of decacherry is displayed. The failure of the decachery is one of notification modes for notifying the deviation (panel fluctuation flow PF21).

  Even if there is no cherry chance entry, a large panel chance entry occurs when the chance figure stops at any of the 12 panel designs. As shown in the matrix display screen 6140 (FIG. 135 (3)), when the chance symbol 6141 stops, a large panel chance enters. After entering the large panel chance, the process proceeds to the panel fluctuation flow PF23 or the panel fluctuation flow PF24. The panel fluctuation flow PF23 or the panel fluctuation flow PF24 is distributed based on whether or not it is a big hit, the type of big hit (value magnitude), or the like.

  [Panel Fluctuation Flow PF23] As shown in the matrix display screen 6100, continuous push button hits are guided by cut-in 6101. Thereafter, the process proceeds to the panel fluctuation flow PF25 or the panel fluctuation flow PF26 in accordance with the derived result form.

  [Panel Fluctuation Flow PF24] As shown in the matrix display screen 6110, a single push button (= “one blow”) is guided by the cut-in 6111. Thereafter, the process proceeds to the panel fluctuation flow PF25 or the panel fluctuation flow PF26 in accordance with the derived result form.

  [Panel Fluctuation Flow PF25] As shown in the matrix display screen 6150 (FIG. 135 (4)), chance symbols are displayed on a large panel having the size of 12 panel symbols. The appearance of the chance symbol on the large panel is one of notification modes for notifying the big hit confirmation (panel fluctuation flow PF27).

  [Panel Fluctuation Flow PF26] As shown in the matrix display screen 6160 (FIG. 136 (1)), the large panel chance failure is displayed. The failure to establish a large panel chance is one of notification modes for notifying a deviation (panel fluctuation flow PF28).

  In addition, even if there is no entry to either the cherry chance or the large panel chance, as shown in the matrix display screen 6170 (FIG. 136 (2)), the large chance pattern 6171 stops on any of the 12 panel symbols. There are things to do. The big chance symbol 6171 is one of notification modes for notifying the big hit decision without passing through the large panel chance like the chance symbol (panel fluctuation flow PF27).

  Further, in any of the panel fluctuation flows, a cut-in notice as shown in the matrix display screen 6180 (FIG. 136 (3)) may be made. The cut-in notice notifies the expected value for the derived result mode. For example, the matrix display screen 6180 displays a character B 6182, a character C 6183, and a character A 6184 in the cut-in frame 6181. As a result, the matrix display screen 6180 can notify the establishment of the columns A to C in advance. The cut-in frame 6181 displays three characters in three frames, but may display one, two, or four characters. In that case, the gaming machine 10 can notify an expected value corresponding to the number of characters to be displayed.

  Next, a special effect display screen in the low probability display state of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a diagram illustrating an example of the special effect display screen in the low probability display state according to the eighth embodiment.

  The display screen 630 is a display screen for special effects performed in the low-probability display state. The special effect is performed using a part of the display screen 610 in the special display state. The special effect is performed when a highly variable display is performed in a low probability state. In this special effect, depending on the degree of expectation (corresponding to the result of the change display), the panel change as described above may be performed, or after the panel change, the specific effect is developed. May be.

  Display screen 630 includes a special display state change display unit 611 and a low probability display state hold display unit 631. The special display state variation display unit 611 is a display element common to the display screen 630. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can produce a sense of expectation to the player that is the same as or more than the special display state while being in the low probability display state.

  The low probability display state hold display section 631 includes a hold digest display 632 and a hold display 633. The low-probability display state hold display unit 631 is a display mode that is distinguishable from the special display state hold display unit 612, and is a display element that is not shared with the display screen 630. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate to the player that it is in the low probability display state.

  In addition, the special effect to be performed in the low probability display state may be performed with only one variation in which a highly anticipated variation display is performed, or there is a starting memory in which a highly anticipated variation display is performed by prefetching or the like. In this case, the display may be performed for a plurality of variation displays extending to the variation display based on the start-up memory.

  Next, background display outside the frame according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139. First, the background display outside the frame and the background display within the frame will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 138 is a diagram illustrating an example of an out-of-frame background display and an in-frame background display according to the eighth embodiment.

  Display screen 640 includes an out-of-frame background display 641 and an in-frame background display 642. The out-of-frame background display 641 can be observed both during the change display of the panel symbol and during the stop display of the panel symbol. The in-frame background display 642 is observable during the display change of the panel symbol because the panel symbol is positioned on the front surface, but cannot be observed during the stop display of the panel symbol.

  Further, the outside frame background display 641 and the inside frame background display 642 are different from each other, and the outside frame background display 641 and the inside frame background display 642 do not form an integral picture. Also, the in-frame background display 642 is different in that a moving image that loops in a predetermined time is used as a background display, and the out-of-frame background display 641 is a background display of a still image.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 may change the display mode of the in-frame background display 642 in accordance with the progress of the game. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can set the in-frame background display 642 as an expected value or a notification display of the progress of the game. In such a gaming machine 10, since the in-frame background display 642 is located on the back of the panel symbol, it is possible to perform notification display without hindering the visibility of symbol variation.

Next, background display outside the frame and panel display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 139 is a diagram illustrating an example of an out-of-frame background display and a panel display according to the eighth embodiment.
Display screen 650 includes an out-of-frame background display 641 and a panel display 651. The panel display 651 displays four characters, that is, four sets of column establishment notification panels in four columns from the A column to the D column. The out-of-frame background display 641 and the panel display 651 are different from each other, but the out-of-frame background display 641 and the panel display 651 form an integral picture.

  Thus, the integrated picture generated by the out-of-frame background display 641 and the panel display 651 is displayed in a larger area than that displayed in each partial area. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can perform a powerful display, and such a powerful display contributes to an increase in the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine 10, the timing at which the picture outside the frame 641 and the panel display 651 form an integral picture is determined to be a big hit, but not limited to this, at the time of reach notice, at the time of reach, at the time of big hit notice, at the time of re-draw The required timing can be set.

  Further, the display mode of the out-of-frame background display 641 and the panel display 651 is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of types. In that case, according to the picture united by the out-of-frame background display 641 and the panel display 651, the contents of the notification and the magnitude of the game value given to the player may be changed. According to this, the out-of-frame background display 641 displayed in advance functions as a notice of notice of the notice contents.

The gaming machine 10 of the eighth embodiment described above has the following characteristics in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a game control unit (game control device 100) and a display control unit (production control device 300). The game control unit sets the second gaming state (second high probability state) after the first gaming state (first high probability state) and sets the third gaming state (low probability state) after the second gaming state. The first gaming state is advantageous to the player in the first index (probability state of the special figure game: high probability) and the second index (general power support: yes). The second gaming state is advantageous to the player in the first index (probability state of special figure game: high probability) and disadvantageous to the player in the second index (special power support: none). The third gaming state is disadvantageous to the player in the first index (probability state of the special game: low probability) and the second index (general power support: none). The display control unit sets the first display state (high probability display state) to display the variable display game on the display device in the first mode in the first gaming state, and displays the variable display game in the second gaming state and the third gaming state. The second display state (special display state) is displayed on the display device in the second mode.

(2) The display control unit changes from the second display state (special display state) to the third display state (low probability display state) when the predetermined condition is satisfied.
(3) The game control unit changes from the first game state to the second game state when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(4) The game control unit changes from the second game state to the third game state when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
(5) Both the state transition condition set by the display control unit and the state transition condition set by the game control unit are that the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number.

(6) The number of changes serving as the state transition condition set by the display control unit is larger than the number of changes serving as the state transition condition set by the game control unit.
[Ninth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 to 151. In the gaming machine shown in the ninth embodiment, the display device 41 and the option setting unit 25 can perform the hold display (starting memory display) in the variable display game. First, the connection between the effect control device of the ninth embodiment and the option setting unit will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a diagram illustrating a connection example between the effect control device and the option setting unit according to the ninth embodiment.

  The option setting unit 25 includes a push button LED 25c, a touch sensor 25d, and a push button SW25e. The push button LED 25c is a nine-color full-color LED. The touch sensor 25d can detect the player's touch operation at eight locations. The push button SW25e can detect the pressing operation of the option setting unit 25.

  The effect control device 300 and the option setting unit 25 are electrically connected. The effect control device 300 outputs a control signal of the push button LED 25c to the option setting unit 25, and inputs a detection signal of the touch sensor 25d and a detection signal of the push button SW25e from the option setting unit 25.

  Here, the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b described with reference to FIG. 4 will be described again. The selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b are signals detected by a combination of a detection signal from the touch sensor 25d and a detection signal from the push button SW25e. For example, the state in which the touch sensor 25d detects the touch operation at the left and right positions corresponding to the selection operation and the push button SW25e detects the pressing operation of the option setting unit 25 corresponds to the ON state of the selection button switch 25a. The state in which the touch sensor 25d detects the touch operation at the center position corresponding to the determination operation and the push button SW25e detects the pressing operation of the option setting unit 25 corresponds to the ON state of the determination button switch 25b. Hereinafter, in the ninth embodiment, the option setting unit 25 is referred to as a push button or a PB (Push Button).

  Next, the arrangement of the push button LED 25c and the touch sensor 25d in the push button 25 of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a diagram illustrating an arrangement example of the push button LED and the touch sensor in the push button according to the ninth embodiment.

  The push button 25 has a cylindrical shape in which the rough shape of the upper surface when the player looks down is substantially circular. The push button 25 has nine small circular portions 250 to 258 that are about the size of a fingertip on the upper surface thereof, the small circular portion 250 is disposed at the center of the upper surface, and 8 on the circumference surrounding the small circular portion 250. Two small circle parts 251 to 258 are arranged.

  The small circle portion 250 arranges one system of push button LEDs 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW4) within the circumference thereof. The small circle part 251 is located to the left of the small circle part 250, and arranges one system of push button LEDs 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW1) within the circumference. The small circle part 252 is located in the diagonally upper left direction of the small circle part 250, and arranges one system of push button LEDs 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW2) within the circumference. The small circle portion 253 is positioned above the small circle portion 250 and arranges one system of push button LEDs 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW3) within the circumference thereof. The small circle part 254 is located in the diagonally upper right direction of the small circle part 250, and arranges one system of push button LEDs 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW5) in the circumference thereof. The small circle portion 255 is located to the right of the small circle portion 250, and one system of push button LEDs 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW6) are arranged within the circumference. The small circle portion 256 is positioned obliquely downward to the right of the small circle portion 250, and one system of push button LEDs 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW7) are arranged within the circumference. The small circle portion 257 is positioned below the small circle portion 250 and arranges one system of push button LEDs 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW8) in the circumference thereof. The small circle portion 258 is located in the diagonally lower left direction of the small circle portion 250, and one system of push button LEDs 25c is arranged in the circumference thereof. Since the small circle part 258 does not arrange the touch sensor 25d, the small circle part 258 has a star-shaped polygonal design so that it can be easily distinguished from the small circle parts 250 to 257 where the touch sensor 25d is arranged. Further, since the small circle portion 258 does not arrange the touch sensor 25d, it can be a home position when the player operates the eight touch sensors 25d. When the push button 25 is in the center of the gaming machine 10 and the operation unit 24 is on the right side, the small circle portion 258 is located on the left side of the small circle portions 251 to 258 when viewed from the player side. This makes it easy for the player to handle the small circle portion 258 as the home position.

  In the push button 25, the touch sensor 25d is not disposed in the small circle portion 258, but the touch sensor 25d may be disposed in the same manner as the small circle portions 250 to 257. Further, the push button 25 may be provided with a touch panel capable of detecting the position coordinates of the player's touch operation instead of the touch sensor 25d. In that case, the effect control apparatus 300 can detect the touch operation of the small circle portions 250 to 258 from the coordinates corresponding to the small circle portions 250 to 258 and the position coordinates detected by the touch panel.

  Next, the variable display screen in the display device 41 of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variable display screen in the display device according to the ninth embodiment.

  The variable display in-progress screen 660 is the display content of the display device 41. The variable display in-progress screen 660 includes display patterns 661, 662, 663, a reserved display 664, a hold display 665, a special figure 1 hold number display 667, and a special figure 2 hold number display 668. The fluctuation display in-progress screen 660 indicates that the decorative symbols 661, 662, and 663 are changing, and indicates that the corresponding special figure change display game is in the change display state. The reserved digest display 664 indicates that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state and can notify the degree of expectation for the game result according to the display mode. According to the display mode, the hold display 665 can clearly indicate the hold memory number of the special figure variation display game, and can notify the expectation for the game result for each hold memory. The special figure 1 hold number display 667 displays the reserved memory number (starting memory number) of the special figure 1 game. The special figure 2 hold number display 668 displays the hold storage number of the special figure 2 game. The reserved memory number displayed by the hold display 665 corresponds to the sum of the reserved memory number displayed by the special figure 1 hold number display 667 and the reserved memory number displayed by the special figure 2 hold number display 668. For example, when the special figure 1 hold number display 667 displays “4” and the special figure 2 hold number display 668 displays “4”, the hold display 665 displays the number of hold memories by displaying eight round icons. Indicates “8”.

  The special figure 1 hold number display 667 and the special figure 2 hold number display 668 are displayed at positions that do not enter the player's blind spot even by the operation of the board effect device 44 or the game ball rolling on the front side. The number of reserved memories is clearly indicated to the player. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 always improves the degree of freedom of the display mode of the hold display 665 while ensuring that the number of hold memories is clearly indicated to the player.

  Next, mutual effects between the hold display on the display device 41 of the ninth embodiment and the hold display on the push button 25 will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. First, switching from the hold display on the display device 41 to the hold display on the push button 25 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 is a diagram illustrating an example of switching (PB switching) from a hold display to a hold display using a push button in the display device according to the ninth embodiment.

  The variable display in-progress screen 670 is a display content of the display device 41 when the hold display is switched from the display device 41 to the push button 25 (PB switching). The variable display in-progress screen 670 includes a hold digest display 664, a special figure 1 hold number display 667, a special figure 2 hold number display 668, a special figure game game display 671, a switching guidance display 672, and a display for each hold storage 6751. ~ 6758. The special figure game display 671 is a display including at least a part of the display content related to the game state of the special figure game displayed on the display device 41 before switching the hold display. For example, the special figure game display 671 indicates that the decorative symbols 661, 662, and 663 are changing. The switching guidance display 672 is a display that guides switching of the display destination of the hold display from the display device 41 to the push button 25. Each hold storage display 6751-6758 is a display column of each hold storage. Each hold storage display 6751-6758 indicates that the display destination of the hold storage is switched to the push button 25 by a blank display in the display field. Note that the display device 41 displays the number of reserved memories on the special figure 1 hold number display 667 and the special figure 2 hold number display 668 in order to distinguish it from no hold memory even if the display for each hold storage 6751 to 6758 is blank. To do.

  The push button 25 displays the hold memory displayed on the hold memory display 6751-6758 on the small circle portions 250-257. The small circle portion 251 corresponds to the display for each hold storage 6751, the small circle portion 252 corresponds to the display for each hold storage 6752, the small circle portion 253 corresponds to the display for each hold storage 6753, and the small circle portion 254 corresponds to the display for each hold storage. Corresponds to display 6754. Further, the small circle portion 255 corresponds to the hold memory display 6755, the small circle portion 256 corresponds to the hold memory display 6756, the small circle portion 257 corresponds to the hold memory display 6757, and the small circle portion 250 holds. This corresponds to the display 6758 for each storage. Further, the push button 25 displays a display corresponding to the reserved digest display 664 on the small circle portion 258.

  It should be noted that the display mode of the push button LED 25c in the small circle portions 250 to 258 corresponds to the hold memory displayed by the hold memory indications 6751 to 6758 before the display destination is switched. For example, when the on-hold storage display 6751 indicates that there is on-hold storage in white, the push button LED 25c displays the small circle portion 251 in white. Further, when the on-hold storage display 6752 displays the presence of the on-hold storage in red, the push button LED 25c displays the small circle portion 252 in red. It should be noted that the push button LED 25c may notify the player that the display destination of the hold storage has been switched by highlighting such as blinking or brightness enhancement.

  Further, the push button LED 25c may perform an initialized display regardless of the display mode of the hold memory displayed by the hold memory display 6751 to 6758 before the display destination is switched. For example, the push button LED 25c may display all the lights in white (initial display color) after switching the display destination.

  Next, the display mode update of the hold display in the push button 25 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 144 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode update of the hold display in the push button according to the ninth embodiment.

  The push button 25 updates the display mode of the small circle portions 250 to 257 in accordance with the player's touch operation on the small circle portions 250 to 257. The effect control device 300 detects the touch operation of the player by the touch sensor 25d, and updates the display mode of the push button LED 25c based on the game result corresponding to the hold display. That is, the production control device 300 notifies the pre-reading notice about the hold display selected by the player. For example, the production control device 300 detects that the player has touched the small circle portion 257, updates the emission color of the small circle portion 257 from white to red, and notifies the pre-reading notice.

  In addition, the production control device 300 may limit the player's touch operation to the small circle portions 250 to 257 by the number of operations such as once or twice, or the operation may be performed for 1 second or 2 seconds. You may limit the time. In addition, the production control device 300 restricts the operation condition so that the player's touch operation on the small circle portions 250 to 257 is updated until any display mode of the small circle portions 250 to 257 is updated. May be.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 may set the update range of the display mode according to one touch operation of the player as one or more of the small circle portions 250 to 257. For example, the production control device 300 may update the display color of only the small circle portion 254 with respect to detection of the touch operation of the small circle portion 254, or the small circle portion 254 and the small circle portions 253 on both sides thereof. The display color may be updated including 255.

  In addition, when two or more touch operations are detected at the same time, the effect control device 300 can set the range in which the touch operation is detected in the small circle portions 250 to 257 as the display range update range. For example, when the touch control is detected in the small circle part 251 and the small circle part 253, the effect control device 300 sets the small circle part 251 and the small circle part 253 as the notification target of the pre-reading notice, and the remaining small circle part 252. Then, the small circle portions 254 to 257 can be excluded from the notification target of the prefetch notice. Thereby, the production | presentation control apparatus 300 can shorten the time concerning the alerting | presenting effect of a prefetch notice.

  In addition, when the effect control device 300 detects two or more touch operations at the same time, all of the small circle portions 250 to 257 can be set as the display range update range. For example, when the small circle portion 251 and the small circle portion 253 detect a touch operation, the effect control device 300 can set the small circle portions 251 to 257 as notification targets for the prefetch notice. Thereby, the production | presentation control apparatus 300 can shorten the time concerning the alerting | presenting effect of a prefetch notice.

  In addition, when two or more touch operations are detected at the same time, the effect control device 300 can make all of the small circle portions 250 to 257 out of the display mode update range. For example, when the small circle portion 251 and the small circle portion 253 detect a touch operation, the effect control device 300 can exclude the small circle portions 251 to 257 from being notified of the prefetch notice. Thereby, the production control device 300 can eliminate an erroneous touch operation by the player.

  Note that the push button 25 may update the display mode of the small circle portion 258 to give a notice of the change. The effect control device 300 detects the pressing operation of the push button SW25e in a state where none of the touch sensors 25d corresponding to the small circle portions 250 to 257 detects the touch operation, so that the small circle portion 258 is detected. Corresponding touch operations can be detected. In this case, the effect control device 300 may include the hold digest display 664 in the target of the hold display switching from the display device 41 to the push button 25.

  Next, switching from the hold display on the push button 25 to the hold display on the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 is a diagram illustrating an example of switching from the hold display on the push button according to the ninth embodiment to the hold display on the display device (end of PB switching).

  The variable display in-progress screen 680 is the display content of the display device 41 when the hold display is switched from the push button 25 to the display device 41 (when the PB switching ends). The variable display in-progress screen 680 includes a hold digest display 664, a special figure 1 hold number display 667, a special figure 2 hold number display 668, a special figure game game display 671, a switching guidance display 682, and a hold storage display 6851. ~ 6858. The switching guidance display 682 is a display that guides switching of the display destination of the hold display from the push button 25 to the display device 41. Each hold storage display 6851 to 6858 is a display column of each hold storage. Each hold storage display 6851 to 6858 displays the hold storage whose display mode is updated by the push button 25. For example, when the emission color of the small circle portion 257 is updated from white to red, the hold storage every display 6857 displays a red icon. Further, when the light emission colors of the small circle portions 250 to 256 remain white and are not updated, the on-hold storage displays 6851 to 6856 and 6858 display white icons.

The push button 25 initializes (for example, turns off) the display of the small circle portions 250 to 257 by switching the display destination of the hold display to the display device 41.
In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform an effect as if the hold display moves between the display device 41 and the push button 25 to the player. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can produce a player's involvement in the hold display by receiving a touch operation with the push button 25 while the push button 25 performs the hold display. Such a gaming machine can provide a novel effect to the player and can improve the game performance.

  Next, a special figure hold management table used for managing the display mode of the hold display on the display device 41 and the push button 25 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 is a diagram illustrating an example of the special figure hold management table according to the ninth embodiment.

  The special figure hold management table 690 is generated and updated by the effect control device 300 and stored in the storage unit (for example, the RAM 322) of the effect control device 300. For example, the effect control device 300 can generate or update the special figure hold management table 690 based on various commands received from the game control device 100 (prefetch effect design instruction, prefetch variation pattern instruction, hold number command, etc.).

  The special figure hold management table 690 includes an item “special figure type”, an item “number of holds”, an item “prefetch information”, an item “display destination”, an item “display category before update”, and an item “after update”. Data including “display category”. The item “special map type” is a special chart type related to the number of holds, and includes “special map 1” and “special map 2”. The item “number of holds” corresponds to four hold memories for each type of special figure, and includes “1” to “4”.

  The item “look-ahead information” is information relating to the result of the variable display game derived corresponding to the on-hold storage, and includes “out-of-game”, “big hit”, “small hit”, and the like. If there is no corresponding reserved storage, the item “prefetch information” is “−”. Note that the item “look-ahead information” may include information such as whether there is a probability change, whether or not there is a power transmission support, and the number of rounds for the big hit or the small hit.

  The item “display destination” indicates the display destination of the corresponding hold storage, and includes “PB”, “LCD”, and “−”. In the item “display destination”, “PB” indicates that the corresponding hold storage display destination is the push button 25, “LCD” indicates that the corresponding hold storage display destination is the display device 41, and “ “-” Indicates that there is no corresponding display destination.

  The item “display category before update” indicates information that can specify the display mode before update of the hold display based on the touch operation. The item “display category before update” includes “1” to “8” that specify the display category when there is a corresponding reserved memory, and “−” that does not specify the display category because there is no corresponding reserved memory. . The item “updated display classification” indicates information that can specify the display mode after updating the hold display based on the touch operation. The item “display category after update” includes “1” to “8” that specify the display category when there is a corresponding reserved memory, and “−” that does not specify the display category because there is no corresponding reserved memory. . The display classification will be described later with reference to FIG.

  According to the special figure hold management table 690, the hold number “1” of the special figure type “special figure 1” is the pre-read information “out”, the display destination is the push button 25, the pre-update display classification and the post-update display. Each of the categories is “1”. Therefore, the number of holds “1” of the special figure type “special figure 1” indicates that the display category is not updated even if the push button 25 is touched. Further, the number of holds “4” of the special figure type “special figure 1” indicates that there is no reserved memory.

  Further, the number of holds “3” of the special figure type “special figure 2” is the pre-read information “big hit”, the display destination is the push button 25, the pre-update display classification is “2”, and the post-update display classification is “5”. ". Accordingly, the number of holds “3” of the special figure type “special figure 2” indicates that the display category is updated from “2” to “5” by the touch operation on the push button 25. Note that the hold number “3” of the special figure type “special figure 2” may maintain the display category “2” if there is no touch operation on the push button 25, or after a predetermined time has passed without any touch operation. It may be updated to the display category “5”.

  Further, the number of holds “3” of the special figure type “special figure 1” is the pre-read information “out of”, the display destination is the push button 25, the pre-update display classification is “2”, and the post-update display classification is “1”. ". Therefore, the number of holds “3” of the special figure type “special figure 1” indicates that the display category is updated from “2” to “1” by the touch operation on the push button 25. The hold number “3” of the special figure type “special figure 1” may be maintained in the display category “2” if there is no touch operation on the push button 25, or after a predetermined time has passed without any touch operation. It may be updated to the display category “1”.

  Next, a display category table used for display category management will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display classification table according to the ninth embodiment. The display classification table 691 is information set in advance, and is stored in the storage unit (eg, PROM 321) of the effect control device 300.

  The display category table 691 is data including an item “display category”, an item “display mode”, an item “promotion during PB effect”, and an item “demotion during PB effect”. The item “display category” is a type of display category, and includes “1” to “8”.

  The item “display mode” corresponds to the display categories “1” to “8”, and “white”, “blue”, “yellow”, “green” in descending order of expectation to be felt by the player. , “Red”, “pattern 1”, “pattern 2”, and “rainbow”. The push button LED 25c has a time series change of “white”, “blue”, and “yellow” for “pattern 1”, a time series change of “yellow”, “green”, and “red” for “pattern 2”, “ The “rainbow” may be represented by time series changes of “white”, “blue”, “yellow”, “green”, “red”.

  The item “promotion during PB effect” is information indicating whether or not the display category is promoted. Display categories “1” to “6” that have a relatively low degree of expectation that the player can perceive are allowed to be promoted to a higher display category. In addition, display categories “7” and “8” that have a relatively high expectation level to be perceived by the player or that are at the upper limit are not allowed to be promoted to a higher display category. By such promotion of the display category, the production control device 300 can give the player the motivation of the player's involvement in the hold display, which contributes to the improvement of the operation of the gaming machine 10.

  The item “demotion during PB effect” is information indicating whether or not the display category is demoted. The display categories “3” to “8”, which have a relatively high expectation level to be perceived by the player, and the display category “1”, which has a lower expectation level to be perceived by the player, are demoted to a lower display category. Not allowed. Further, the display category “2” whose expectation level that the player can perceive is close to the lower limit is allowed to be demoted to a lower display category. By further demotion of such a low display category, the production control device 300 can improve the reliability of the notification for the hold display to the player. That is, the gaming machine 10 can ensure the reliability for the notification of the degree of expectation even if there is a lot of production with a low degree of expectation.

  Next, the switching timing of the hold display of the display device 41 and the push button 25 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 148 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing chart of switching between the display device of the ninth embodiment and the push button hold display.

  [Timing T10] Before the hold effect using the push button 25 is executed, the effect control device 300 is in a control state in which the hold operation is invalidated. The display device 41 performs a hold display (for example, the variable display in-progress screen 660) in the display mode L1. The push button 25 lights the push button LED 25c in the display mode P1 (normal display).

  [Timing T11] This is a timing for establishing a hold display destination switching condition from the display device 41 to the push button 25, and the effect control device 300 enters a control state in which the hold operation is validated. The display device 1 hides the hold display (for example, the variable display in-progress screen 670) in the display mode L2. The push button 25 lights the push button LED 25c in a display mode P2 (display before touch operation: for example, the push button 25 (option setting unit 25) illustrated in FIG. 13).

  [Timing T12] The effect control device 300 detects a touch operation by the touch sensor 25d. The effect control device 300 detects the touch operation as a hold operation and updates the display mode of the push button LED 25c. The display device 1 continues to hide the hold display. The push button 25 lights the push button LED 25c in a display mode P3 (display after touch operation: for example, the push button 25 (option setting unit 25) illustrated in FIG. 14).

  [Timing T13] The effect control device 300 detects a touch operation by the touch sensor 25d. The effect control device 300 detects the touch operation as a hold operation and updates the display mode of the push button LED 25c. The display device 1 continues to hide the hold display. The push button 25 lights the push button LED 25c in the display mode P4 (display after the second touch operation). Thus, the production control device 300 can detect two or more hold operations and update the display mode of the push button LED 25c.

  [Timing T14] It is the timing for establishing the switching end condition of the hold display destination from the display device 41 to the push button 25, and the effect control device 300 enters a control state in which the hold operation is invalidated. The display device 1 continues to hide the hold display. The push button 25 lights the push button LED 25c in the display mode P5 (display before switching: for example, blinking).

  [Timing T15] The production control device 300 switches the hold display destination after a predetermined time from the timing T14 in order to guide the change of the hold display destination from the push button 25 to the display device 41. The display device 1 performs the hold display (for example, the variable display during screen 680) in the display mode L3 reflecting the display mode P4 or the display mode P5. The push button 25 lights the push button LED 25c in the display mode P1 (normal display).

[Prefetch control processing]
Next, the look-ahead control process for performing such a hold effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 149 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of prefetch control processing according to the ninth embodiment. The prefetch control process is triggered by the fact that the effect control device 300 has received a required command (for example, a prefetch effect design instruction, a prefetch variation pattern instruction, a hold number command) from the game control device 100. CPU 311). The pre-reading control process is a process for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect on hold display and the execution destination in the case of execution.

  [Step D301] The control unit generates or updates the special figure hold management table 690 (see FIG. 146) based on the prefetch effect design instruction, the prefetch variation pattern instruction, and the hold number command.

  [Step D302] The control unit determines whether or not to perform prefetching based on a prefetch effect design instruction, a prefetch variation pattern instruction, and a hold count command. Note that the control unit may uniquely determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect of the hold display based on the command received from the game control device 100, or may determine by lottery.

  [Step D303] The control unit determines whether or not to execute the prefetching effect. The control unit proceeds to step D304 when executing the pre-reading effect of the hold display, and ends the pre-reading control process when not executing the pre-reading effect of the hold display.

  [Step D304] The control unit determines the execution destination of the prefetch effect based on the prefetch effect design instruction, the prefetch variation pattern instruction, and the hold count command. Note that the control unit may uniquely determine the execution destination of the pre-reading effect of the hold display based on the command received from the game control device 100, or may determine by lottery. However, the control unit can exclude the push button 25 from the execution destination of the prefetch effect according to the game control state. For example, when the use of the push button 25 overlaps the display effect being executed, the control unit sets the execution destination of the prefetch effect as the display device 41. Further, the control unit can set the display device 41 as the execution destination of the pre-reading effect when the number of holdings reaches a predetermined number or an upper limit. In addition, the control unit can set the display device 41 as the execution destination of the pre-reading effect in a specific gaming state such as “special time” shown in the eighth embodiment.

  [Step D305] The control unit determines the determination result of the execution destination of the prefetch effect. The control unit proceeds to step D306 when the execution destination of the pre-reading effect of the hold display is the push button 25 (PB), and proceeds to step D307 when the execution destination of the pre-reading effect of the hold display is the display device 41 (LCD). move on.

  [Step D306] The control unit sets PB reservation prefetching. With the PB hold prefetch setting, a PB hold prefetch process described later with reference to FIG. 150 is executed. The control unit ends the prefetch control process after setting the PB hold prefetch.

  [Step D307] The control unit sets LCD hold prefetching. Depending on the setting of the LCD hold prefetch, the hold prefetch process in the display device 41 is executed. A detailed description of the LCD hold prefetch process is omitted. The control unit ends the prefetch control process after setting the LCD hold prefetch.

[PB hold prefetch processing]
Next, the PB reservation prefetch process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the PB reservation prefetch process according to the ninth embodiment. The PB hold prefetch process is a process executed at a predetermined cycle by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300, triggered by the setting of the PB hold prefetch in step D306 of the prefetch control process.

  [Step D311] The control unit determines whether the hold display destination is being switched to the push button 25 or not. The control unit can determine whether or not the hold display destination is being switched to the push button 25 by referring to the item “display destination” of the special figure hold management table 690 (see FIG. 146). The control unit proceeds to step D314 when the hold display destination is being switched to the push button 25, and proceeds to step D312 when it is not being switched.

  [Step D312] The control unit determines whether a hold display destination switching condition (PB switching condition) from the display device 41 to the push button 25 is satisfied. For example, the PB switching condition is an elapse of a predetermined time after the execution destination of the pre-reading effect for the hold display is determined by the push button 25. The predetermined time here may be set as a fixed time such as 1000 ms, for example, or the remaining time of fluctuation of the special-figure game that is fluctuating in order to match the production start timing with the special-figure game that is fluctuating It may be set based on the above. When the PB switching condition is satisfied, the control unit proceeds to step D313, and when the PB switching condition is not satisfied, the control unit ends the PB reservation prefetch process.

  [Step D313] The control unit determines a switching range of the hold display destination from the display device 41 to the push button 25. A control part determines all the hold display of a special figure game as a switching range. The control unit may determine a part of the special game hold display as the switching range. For example, the control unit can determine the hold display of the special figure 2 game among the hold displays of the special figure game as the switching range. Thereby, the production control device 300 can produce a different sense of expectation depending on the switching range of the hold display.

  [Step D314] The control unit determines whether a hold display destination switching end condition (PB switching end condition) from the display device 41 to the push button 25 is satisfied. For example, the PB switching end condition includes elapse of a predetermined time after PB switching, a predetermined PB operation, and the like. The control unit proceeds to step D315 when the PB switching end condition is satisfied, and proceeds to step D316 when the PB switching end condition is not satisfied.

  [Step D315] The control unit determines a switching end range of the hold display destination from the display device 41 to the push button 25. The control unit determines all the hold display of the special figure game as the switching end range. The control unit may determine a part of the special game hold display as the switching end range. For example, the control unit can determine the hold display of the special figure 2 game among the hold displays of the special figure game as the switching end range. Further, the control unit can determine one of the special game hold displays as the switching end range. Thereby, the production | presentation control apparatus 300 can perform the return movement of the hold display from the push button 25 to the display apparatus 41 in multiple times. Thereby, the production control device 300 can produce a different sense of expectation according to the return timing of the hold display from the push button 25 to the display device 41.

  [Step D316] The control unit determines whether a touch operation (PB operation) of the push button 25 is detected. The control unit may detect the PB operation only from the detection signal of the touch sensor 25d, or may detect the PB operation from the combination of the detection signal of the touch sensor 25d and the detection signal of the push button SW25e. Good. When the PB operation is detected, the control unit proceeds to step D317, and when the PB operation is not detected, the control unit ends the PB reservation prefetch process.

  [Step D317] The control unit determines an operation effect range based on the PB operation. The control unit determines a range in which the touch operation is performed among the small circle portions 250 to 257 in which the touch operation is performed as an operation effect range.

  [Step D318] The control unit determines a PB hold effect (push button 25 hold effect) corresponding to the switching range determined in Step D313, the switching end range determined in Step D315, or the operation effect range determined in Step D317. . At this time, the control unit can determine the display category for each hold display with reference to the display category table 691.

  [Step D319] The control unit determines the LCD holding effect (the holding effect of the display device 41) corresponding to the switching range determined in Step D313, the switching end range determined in Step D315, or the operation effect range determined in Step D317. . At this time, the control unit can determine the display category for each hold display with reference to the display category table 691. The control unit ends the PB hold prefetch process after determining the LCD hold effect.

  The control unit controls the push button LED 25c based on the PB hold effect determined in step D318, and edits the display content of the display device 41 based on the LCD hold effect determined in step D319. Thereby, the production control device 300 can realize switching of the hold display between the display device 41 and the push button 25.

  Next, the display of the display device 41 and the push button 25 when there is a start prize during switching of the hold display according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 151 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing chart illustrating the updating of the display number of the display device and the push button when there is a start prize while switching the hold display according to the ninth embodiment.

  [Timing T20] The special figure game is in the variable display number “n” time of variable display, and the hold number display on the display device 41 is “8”. At this time, the display device 41 displays “4” in both the special figure 1 hold number display 667 and the special figure 2 hold number display 668. The display device 41 displays eight icons corresponding to the hold display. On the other hand, the push button 25 does not perform a display corresponding to the hold display.

  [Timing T21] The special game ends the variable display number “n” of the variable display, and starts the variable display number “n + 1” of the variable display. As a result, the hold number display on the display device 41 is “7”. At this time, in the display device 41, one of the special figure 1 hold number display 667 and the special figure 2 hold number display 668 displays "4", and the other displays "3". The display device 41 displays seven icons corresponding to the hold display. On the other hand, the push button 25 does not perform a display corresponding to the hold display.

  [Timing T22] This is the timing when the hold display is switched from the display device 41 to the push button 25. Although the hold number display is “7”, the display device 41 does not display an icon corresponding to the hold display. On the other hand, the push button 25 performs display corresponding to the hold display with the seven small circle portions 251 to 257.

  [Timing T23] Due to the start winning, the number-of-holds display on the display device 41 becomes “8”. Even if the hold number display is updated, the display device 41 does not display an icon corresponding to the hold display. On the other hand, the push button 25 performs display corresponding to the hold display with the eight small circle portions 250 to 257.

  [Timing T24] The special game ends the fluctuation display number “n + 1” -th variation display, and starts the fluctuation display number “n + 2” -th fluctuation display. As a result, the hold number display on the display device 41 is “7”. At this time, in the display device 41, one of the special figure 1 hold number display 667 and the special figure 2 hold number display 668 displays "4", and the other displays "3". Even if the hold number display is updated, the display device 41 does not display an icon corresponding to the hold display. On the other hand, the push button 25 performs display corresponding to the hold display with the seven small circle portions 251 to 257.

  [Timing T25] This is the timing when the hold display is switched from the push button 25 to the display device 41. The hold number display is “7”, and the display device 41 displays seven icons corresponding to the hold display. On the other hand, the push button 25 does not perform a display corresponding to the hold display.

  Thus, even if there is a start winning or a pending digest during switching of the hold display, the gaming machine 10 can appropriately guide the number of hold displays to the player. In addition, even while the hold display is being switched from the display device 41 to the push button 25, the push button 25 performs a display corresponding to the start winning prize. A game can be given to a player.

  Although the display device 41 does not perform icon display corresponding to the hold display during switching of the hold display, the display device 41 may perform icon display corresponding to the hold display. In that case, it is desirable for the display device 41 to change the icon display mode in order to clearly indicate that the hold display is being switched. For example, the display device 41 can change the display mode of the icon during switching of the hold display to a display smaller than that before switching the hold display, or display with reduced brightness and saturation. Further, the display device 41 can make the display mode of the icon during switching of the hold display simplified than that before switching the hold display.

The display mode of the hold display on the display device 41 may reflect the update of the display mode of the hold display on the push button 25.
[Modification 1 of Ninth Embodiment]
Next, the display of the display device 41 and the push button 25 when there is a start prize during switching of the hold display according to Modification 1 of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 152 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing chart illustrating the updating of the display number of the display device and the push button when there is a start prize during switching of the hold display according to the first modification of the ninth embodiment.

  [Timing T30] The special figure game is in the variable display number “n” time of variable display, and the display device 41 has the hold number display “8”. At this time, the display device 41 displays “4” in both the special figure 1 hold number display 667 and the special figure 2 hold number display 668. The display device 41 displays eight icons corresponding to the hold display. On the other hand, the push button 25 does not perform a display corresponding to the hold display.

  [Timing T31] The special figure game ends the variable display number “n” of the variable display, and starts the variable display number “n + 1” of the variable display. As a result, the hold number display on the display device 41 is “7”. At this time, in the display device 41, one of the special figure 1 hold number display 667 and the special figure 2 hold number display 668 displays "4", and the other displays "3". The display device 41 displays seven icons corresponding to the hold display. On the other hand, the push button 25 does not perform a display corresponding to the hold display.

  [Timing T32] This is the timing when the hold display is switched from the display device 41 to the push button 25. Although the hold number display is “7”, the display device 41 does not display an icon corresponding to the hold display. On the other hand, the push button 25 performs display corresponding to the hold display with the seven small circle portions 251 to 257.

  [Timing T33] The number of holds on the display device 41 is “8” due to the start winning. When the hold number display is updated while the hold display is switched from the display device 41 to the push button 25, the display device 41 displays the hold number added during the hold display switching. Therefore, the display device 41 displays one icon corresponding to the hold display added during the hold display switching. On the other hand, the push button 25 performs display corresponding to the hold display with the seven small circle portions 251 to 257.

  [Timing T34] The special figure game ends the variable display number “n + 1” times of variable display and starts the variable display number “n + 2” times of variable display. As a result, the hold number display on the display device 41 is “7”. At this time, in the display device 41, one of the special figure 1 hold number display 667 and the special figure 2 hold number display 668 displays "4", and the other displays "3". Even if the hold number display is updated, the display device 41 continuously displays the hold number added during the hold display switching. On the other hand, the push button 25 performs display corresponding to the hold display with the six small circle portions 251 to 256.

  [Timing T35] This is the timing when the hold display is switched from the push button 25 to the display device 41. The hold number display is “7”, and the display device 41 displays seven icons corresponding to the hold display. On the other hand, the push button 25 does not perform a display corresponding to the hold display.

  In this way, during the switching of the hold display, if there is a start prize, the display device 41 reflects the update of the display content, and if there is a hold-up, the push button 25 reflects the update of the display content. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can notify the player of the start winning prize and the on-hold digestion easily for the player to understand.

[Modification 2 of Ninth Embodiment]
Next, Modification 2 of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 153 is a diagram illustrating an example of switching (PB switching) from the hold display to the hold display on the touch panel in the display device according to the second modification of the ninth embodiment.

  The variable display in-progress screen 670a is the display content of the display device 41 when the hold display is switched from the display device 41 to the touch panel 260 (when the PB is switched). Note that the gaming machine 10 according to the second modification of the ninth embodiment may include the touch panel 260 instead of the push button 25, or may include the touch panel 260 in addition to the push button 25. The touch panel 260 is provided on the front side of the gaming machine 10 at a position that is easy for the player to operate.

  The variable display in-progress screen 670a includes a switching guidance display 672a. The switching guidance display 672a is a display for guiding switching of the display destination of the hold display from the display device 41 to the touch panel 260. Each hold storage display 6751-6758 indicates that the display destination of the hold storage is switched to the push button 25 by a blank display in the display field.

  The touch panel 260 is configured to include an LCD and a touch sensor, and displays on-hold storage displayed on the on-hold storage display 6751 to 6758 as on-hold display icons 251a to 258a. The touch sensor can detect touches corresponding to the hold display icons 251a to 258a.

  Note that the touch panel 260 may perform a notice of the change corresponding to the pending digest display 664. In this case, the effect control apparatus 300 may include the hold digest display 664 in the target of the hold display switching from the display device 41 to the touch panel 260.

  In addition, although the gaming machine 10 that can switch the hold display between the display device 41 and the push button 25 or between the display device 41 and the touch panel 260 has been described, the switching target is not limited to the hold display, It can also be applied to characters and other displays.

  Moreover, you may make it perform notice notification of a different aspect between the display apparatus 41 and the push button 25, or between the display apparatus 41 and the touch panel 260. FIG. For example, the display mode of the hold display is changed on the push button 25 or the touch panel 260 (change of display color, etc.), and the display mode is changed for the hold display whose display mode is changed after the hold display is switched to the display device 41. You may make it perform the alerting | reporting alerting | reporting (display effect using a character etc.).

  Such a gaming machine 10 includes a primary notice notification function for a hold display that is switched from the display device 41 to the push button 25 or the touch panel 260, and a hold that is switched from the push button 25 or the touch panel 260 to the display device 41. It has a secondary advance notice function for display. The gaming machine 10 can limit the hold notification object of the hold display in the secondary advance notice function to the range of the hold notification object of the hold display in the primary advance notice function. It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 can make the hold notification notice target of the hold display in the primary notice notification function coincide with the notice notification target of the hold display in the secondary notice notification function. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can have two presentation opportunities in the hold display switching, and can improve the gaming property.

The gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment described above has the following characteristics in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a first display device (display device 41), a second display device (push button 25, touch panel 260), and a control unit (production control device 300). The first display device can display identification information (decorative symbols 661 to 663) and start memory (holding display 665) in the variable display game. The second display device includes a display unit (small circle portion 250 to 257: push button LED 25c) that can display start-up memory, and an operation unit (small circle portion 250) that can accept a player's operation input corresponding to the display unit. 257: Touch sensor 25d). The control unit can switch between a first state in which the start memory is displayed on the first display device and a second state in which the start memory is displayed on the second display device (for example, at timing T11), and is accepted in the second state. The display mode of the start memory on the display unit is changed (for example, at timing T12) based on the operation input.

(2) The control unit changes the display mode of the start memory on the display unit based on the operation input received in the second state and the result mode derived based on the start memory.
(3) The control unit displays the start memory on the second display device in a display mode corresponding to the display mode of the start memory displayed by the first display device.

  (4) The control unit associates the display mode of the start memory with the expected degree of the result derived based on the start memory, and changes the display mode having a higher expectation than the display mode before the change in the second state. The display mode is set later.

  (5) The control unit associates the display mode of the start memory with the expected degree of the result derived based on the start memory, and changes the display mode having a lower expectation than the display mode before the change in the second state. The display mode is set later.

(6) The control unit switches from the first state to the second state when the number of start memories reaches a predetermined number or an upper limit.
(7) The control unit switches from the first state to the second state in the specific gaming state.

(8) The control unit displays the start memory on the first display device for the new start memory being switched to the second state.
(9) The control unit displays the start memory on the second display device for the new start memory being switched to the second state.

(10) The control unit can switch between a first state in which the specific start-up memory is displayed on the first display device and a second state in which the specific start-up memory is displayed on the second display device.
In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the ninth embodiment described above has the following characteristics in one aspect.

  (1) The gaming machine 10 includes a first display device (display device 41), a second display device (push button 25, touch panel 260), and a control unit (production control device 300). The first display device can display identification information (decorative symbols 661 to 663) and start memory (holding indications 665, 667, 668) in the variable display game. The second display device includes a first display unit (small circles 250 to 257: push button LED 25c) that can display the start-up memory, and an operation unit that can accept a player's operation input corresponding to the first display unit ( Small circle portions 250 to 257: touch sensor 25d). The control unit includes a first state in which the start memory is displayed on the second display unit (holding display 667, 668) and the third display unit (holding display 665) of the first display device, and the first display unit and the second display. And the second state in which the start memory is displayed can be switched (for example, timing T11), and the display mode of the start memory in the first display unit is changed based on the operation input received in the second state (for example, the timing) T12).

(2) The control unit displays the start memory by the start memory number on the second display unit.
(3) The control unit displays the start-up memory with an icon or a character on the third display unit.

(4) The control unit hides the start-up memory in the third display unit in the second state.
(5) In the second state, the control unit displays the start memory on the first display unit, the second display unit, and the third display unit, and sets the display mode of the start memory on the third display unit to the first state and the second display unit. Different depending on the state.

(6) In (5), the control unit reduces the information amount of the display mode of the start memory in the third display unit in the second state compared to the first state.
(7) In (6), the control unit reduces the type of icon or character that displays the start-up memory.

  (8) The gaming machine 10 has a movable portion that moves on the front side of the display surface of the first display device, and the first display device has a first display area that can be shielded by the movable portion and a second that is not shielded by the movable portion. A 2nd display part is arrange | positioned in a 2nd display area among display areas.

  (9) The gaming machine 10 has a rolling portion of a game ball on the front side of the display surface of the first display device, and the first display device is shielded by the game ball and a third display area that can be shielded by the game ball. The second display unit is arranged in the fourth display area among the fourth display areas that are not performed.

  The above processing functions can be realized by a computer. In that case, a program describing the processing contents of the functions that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have is provided. By executing the program on a computer, the above processing functions are realized on the computer. The program describing the processing contents can be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium. Examples of the computer-readable recording medium include a magnetic storage device, an optical disk, a magneto-optical recording medium, and a semiconductor memory. Magnetic storage devices include hard disk devices (HDD), flexible disks (FD), magnetic tapes, and the like. Optical discs include DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), DVD-RAM, CD (Compact Disk) -ROM / RW (ReWritable), and the like. Magneto-optical recording media include MO (Magneto-Optical disk).

  When distributing the program, for example, a portable recording medium such as a DVD or a CD-ROM in which the program is recorded is sold. It is also possible to store the program in a storage device of a server computer and transfer the program from the server computer to another computer via a network.

  The computer that executes the program stores, for example, the program recorded on the portable recording medium or the program transferred from the server computer in its own storage device. Then, the computer reads the program from its own storage device and executes processing according to the program. The computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute processing according to the program. In addition, each time a program is transferred from a server computer connected via a network, the computer can sequentially execute processing according to the received program.

  Further, at least a part of the above processing functions can be realized by an electronic circuit such as a DSP (Digital Signal Processor), an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), or a PLD (Programmable Logic Device).

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine as shown in the disclosed embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. The present invention can be applied to all gaming machines that use the game balls and slot machines that are medals.

  The disclosed embodiments are to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive. Moreover, you may apply combining each structure of the above-mentioned embodiment and modification. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 11 outer frame 12 front frame 25 option setting unit 25c push button LED
25d Touch sensor 25e Push button SW
100 Game control device 300 Production control device

Claims (1)

A first display device capable of displaying identification information and starting memory in a variable display game;
A second display device comprising: a first display unit capable of displaying the start-up memory; and an operation unit capable of accepting a player's operation input corresponding to the first display unit;
A first state in which the start memory is displayed on the second display unit and the third display unit of the first display device, and a second state in which the start memory is displayed on the first display unit and the second display unit preparative a switchable, changes the display mode of the starting storage of definitive to the first display unit based on the operation input accepted in the second state, and a control unit,
Including gaming machines.

Images